WO2021062745A1 - Paging method and apparatus - Google Patents

Paging method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021062745A1
WO2021062745A1 PCT/CN2019/109663 CN2019109663W WO2021062745A1 WO 2021062745 A1 WO2021062745 A1 WO 2021062745A1 CN 2019109663 W CN2019109663 W CN 2019109663W WO 2021062745 A1 WO2021062745 A1 WO 2021062745A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user
user identity
terminal device
offset value
paging
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/109663
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张宏平
彭文杰
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/109663 priority Critical patent/WO2021062745A1/en
Priority to CN201980100388.3A priority patent/CN114424637B/en
Publication of WO2021062745A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021062745A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/12Inter-network notification

Definitions

  • This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and device for paging in the communication field.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • DSSS dual SIM single standby
  • DSDS dual SIM dual standby
  • DSDA dual Card dual active
  • the two SIM cards in the terminal device share a set of transceivers.
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • a terminal device in an idle or inactive state needs to wake up at a certain time position in a certain period to monitor whether there is a paging on the network. This time position can be called the terminal equipment's Paging occasion (paging occasion, PO).
  • the time domain positions of the PO corresponding to the two SIM cards are the same or overlap, that is, there is a paging conflict. Since the terminal device can only monitor the paging message corresponding to one SIM on one PO, it may happen that the other SIM does not receive the paging message.
  • the present application provides a paging method and device, which can help avoid page loss in DSDS mode terminal equipment.
  • a paging method is provided, which is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity.
  • the method is executed by the terminal device or the chip in the terminal device.
  • the method is executed by a terminal device as an example for description.
  • the terminal device determines that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used to access the network
  • the device pages the terminal device.
  • the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user identity.
  • the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Yes, it helps to avoid missed call problems caused by page loss.
  • the terminal device further supports a second user identity, and the terminal device includes a third PO in a paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user. or
  • the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user.
  • the paging of the second user identity can be monitored first, and the first user identity can be monitored on another PO that does not conflict with the first user identity.
  • User identity paging which can ensure that the paging messages of the two user identities will not be lost.
  • the terminal device when the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device is in the position of the first user as the first user.
  • the first PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message.
  • the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO and the second PO in the first PO as the first user identity, or the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity as the first user identity according to the UE ID calculation.
  • the paging message of the first user identity is monitored on that PO.
  • the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that In the case of possible paging conflicts between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, when the terminal device monitors the paging message with the identity of the first user, it can select the time of the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user. Monitoring on the PO conflicting on the domain resources can avoid the loss of paging messages in the user identity of the terminal device.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the first user equipment identification may be a user equipment identification assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user.
  • the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification).
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier.
  • the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the second user equipment identifier may also include S-TMSI.
  • the terminal device may also receive the second user equipment identifier from the core network device as the first user identity, or the first offset Value, or the second offset value.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
  • the terminal device may determine the second PO according to the foregoing second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
  • the terminal device may send auxiliary information to the core network device as a user identity (such as the first user identity), and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the identity of the first user of the terminal device for determining paging The parameter of the timing, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging timing.
  • the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the terminal device may also send first indication information to the core network device as the first user, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device Support at least two user identities, or indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports at least two user identities, regardless of whether the two user identities may have a paging conflict, the terminal device sends the first indication information to indicate the terminal to the core network device The device supports at least two user identities.
  • the network equipment is often notified whether it needs to send paging messages on at least two POs, so as to reduce the signaling overhead of the system and is easier to implement.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity of the terminal device, the terminal device is Sending the first indication information to the core network device by the first user identity.
  • the terminal device may notify the core network device of its at least two users No more paging conflicts with identities.
  • the access network device can restore the existing mechanism, that is, send a paging message on a PO in a paging cycle to reduce the consumption of paging resources.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity conflicts with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device, so that the access network
  • the device sends paging messages on at least two POs in a paging cycle, which can reduce the consumption of system paging resources.
  • the first indication information may be used to request the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the core network After the core network receives the first indication information, it can learn that the terminal device needs at least two POs in a paging cycle, that is, it can be inferred that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. Paging conflicts may occur for user identity. At this time, in order to avoid paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device, the core network device may assign an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
  • a paging method is provided, which is suitable for core network equipment. This method is executed by a chip in a core network device or terminal device. In the following, the method is executed by the core network device as an example for description.
  • the core network device obtains first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicate a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device At least two PO are included.
  • the core network device sends second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  • At least two POs are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends paging messages on the at least two POs, so that the terminal device is
  • a user identity monitors a paging message it can choose to monitor the paging message on one of the POs (for example, select a PO in a paging cycle that does not have a second user identity supported by the terminal device that conflicts on time domain resources. Paging messages are monitored on the PO), thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further, helping to avoid the problem of missed calls caused by page loss.
  • the core network device may send a paging message to the access network device, and the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to respond to the The terminal device performs paging, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices.
  • the user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
  • the core network device may send an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information .
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. A paging conflict occurred in the user identity.
  • the aforementioned at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  • the core network device may receive auxiliary information sent by the terminal device, and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the parameters of the first user identity of the terminal device for determining the paging occasion, and/or the terminal device The parameter of the second user identity of the device used to determine the paging occasion.
  • the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • a paging method is provided, which is applicable to the first access network device.
  • the method is executed by the first access network device or a chip in the first access network device.
  • the method is executed by the first access network device as an example for description.
  • the first access network device receives second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first access network device is at least two times within a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • a paging occasion PO sends a paging message to the terminal device.
  • the first access network device may also determine the first PO and the second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO.
  • the first access network device sends a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
  • the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Yes, it helps to avoid missed call problems caused by page loss.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the first user equipment identifier may be a user equipment identifier assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user.
  • the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification).
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier.
  • the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain of the second PO The offset of the domain position relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
  • the first access network device may determine the second PO according to the foregoing second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
  • the first access network device may receive a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to contact the terminal device
  • the first user identity performs paging
  • the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the first access network device when the terminal device enters the idle state, the first access network device receives the paging message from the core network device.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices.
  • the user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
  • the first access network device may receive the paging message from the second access network device, and the second The access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the first access network device may receive an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, and the initial context The establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  • the first access network device may also send a paging message to the third access network device, and the first The access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message is used to instruct the third access network device to contact the terminal device for the first Paging with a user identity, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices.
  • the user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • a paging device which is used to execute the foregoing first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the device includes a module for executing the foregoing first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the device supports a first user identity, and the device includes a determining unit and a receiving unit.
  • the determining unit is configured to determine that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used for access The network equipment pages the device.
  • the receiving unit is configured to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user.
  • the device further supports a second user identity, and the device includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user on the second PO as the first user.
  • the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity.
  • the device When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the device operates in the first user as the first user.
  • the PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive the second user equipment identifier from the core network device as the first user identity, or the first bias Shift value, or the second shift value.
  • the sending unit is configured to send first indication information to the core network device as the first user, and the first indication information is used to instruct the apparatus Support at least two user identities, or indicate that the first user identity of the device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the core network device as the first user.
  • a paging device which is used to execute the foregoing second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the device includes a module for executing the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the device includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to obtain first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicates that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two user identities in one paging cycle PO;
  • the sending unit is configured to send second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  • the sending unit is specifically configured to:
  • the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the sending unit is specifically configured to:
  • the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, wherein the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO , The first offset value is used to determine the second PO.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, wherein the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO , The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO .
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the first offset value to the terminal device. Two offset value.
  • a paging device which is used to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the device includes a module for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect or the second aspect.
  • the device includes a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the apparatus sends the terminal device to the terminal on at least two paging occasions PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the device sends a paging message.
  • the determining unit is configured to determine the first PO and the second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO.
  • the sending unit is configured to send a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
  • the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
  • the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
  • the second access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
  • the sending unit is further configured to:
  • the apparatus is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message is used to indicate the third access
  • the network device pages the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein, The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a paging device, including: a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store instructions
  • the processor is used to execute instructions stored in the memory
  • the execution causes the processor to execute any one of the first aspect to the third aspect Aspect or any possible implementation of any aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes a computer program for executing any one of the first to third aspects or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects The instruction of the method in the way.
  • a computer program product contains instructions that, when run on a computer, enable the computer to implement any one or any of the first to third aspects above Any possible implementation of the method described in.
  • a chip which includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the processor is used to call and execute instructions from the communication interface.
  • the processor executes the instructions, it implements the first aspect to the first aspect.
  • the chip may further include a memory in which instructions are stored, and the processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory or instructions derived from other sources.
  • the processor is used to implement any one of the foregoing first to third aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the aspects.
  • a communication system in an eleventh aspect, includes a device capable of implementing the methods and various possible designs of the foregoing first aspect, and the foregoing has the methods and various possible designs that implement the foregoing second aspect.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3A shows a schematic diagram of the passive mode of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 3B shows a schematic diagram of the DSDS mode of the terminal device.
  • Fig. 3C shows a schematic diagram of the DSDA mode of the terminal device.
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic flow chart of a network device initiating paging to a terminal device.
  • Fig. 5 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 shows a schematic flowchart of a paging method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division Multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division duplex FDD
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • access terminal user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids Wireless terminals in transportation safety (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart city (smart city), wireless terminals in smart home (smart home), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (session initiation protocol) , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in a 5G network, or terminal devices in a public land mobile network (PL
  • wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, Gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. Connect with the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be regarded as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, for example, the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • OBU on-board unit
  • the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the access network device in the embodiments of the present application may be a device used to communicate with terminal devices.
  • the access network device may also be called an access device or a wireless access network device, and may be an evolved base station in an LTE system ( evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wearable device As well as the access equipment in the 5G network or the network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, it can be the access point (AP) in the WLAN, or the gNB in the new radio system (NR) system.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • the access network device is a device in the RAN, or in other words, a RAN node that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • gNB transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B, NB
  • BSC base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • BTS home base station
  • BBU baseband unit
  • Wifi wireless fidelity
  • the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • RAN equipment of DU node may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • RAN equipment of DU node RAN equipment
  • the access network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the access network equipment through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell.
  • the cell may be an access network equipment (for example, a base station). ) Corresponding cell.
  • the cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell ), femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • the core network device may be connected to the access network device, so that the terminal device can communicate with the core network device through the access network device.
  • the core network equipment may include the following network elements or functions:
  • Access management function Mainly responsible for access and mobility control, including registration management (RM) and connection management (CM), access authentication and access authorization, Reachability management and mobility management, etc.
  • User plane function mainly provides user plane support, including connection points between PDU sessions and data networks, data packet routing and forwarding, data packet inspection and user plane policy execution, processing QoS for the user plane, and downlink data Packet buffering and triggering of downstream data notifications, etc.
  • Packet control function Mainly a policy control function, including support for a unified policy framework to monitor network behavior and provide policy rules for the control plane to execute.
  • Authentication server function (authentication server function, AUSF): Mainly responsible for providing security-related functions, such as authentication, authentication, etc.
  • Unified data management responsible for functions related to user authentication, including: authentication credential processing, user identity processing, contract information management, access authorization, etc.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1 includes an access network device, a core network device, and a terminal device.
  • the access network equipment for example, works in an evolved universal mobile communication system terrestrial radio access (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) system, or works in an NR system, or works in a next-generation communication system or other In the communication system.
  • the core network equipment for example, works in the E-UTRA system, or works in the NR system, or works in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the core network equipment and the access network equipment can communicate through the NG interface, and the access network equipment and the terminal equipment can communicate through the Uu interface.
  • one access network device can serve multiple terminal devices.
  • Figure 1 only takes one terminal device as an example.
  • One core network device can also serve multiple access network devices. Take one of the access network equipment as an example.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • it includes an access network device 1, an access network device 2, a core network device 1, a core network device 2, and a terminal device.
  • Figure 2 takes the radio access network (RAN) as an example.
  • Core network equipment and access network equipment can communicate through NG interfaces, and access network equipment and access network equipment can communicate through NG interfaces.
  • Xn interface communication can be used to communicate between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • these two access network devices for example, work in the evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system, or work in the NR system, or work in the next-generation communication system Or in other communication systems.
  • E-UTRA evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access
  • NR next-generation communication system
  • These two core network devices for example, work in the E-UTRA system, or in the NR system, or in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the access network device in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is, for example, a base station.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • a 4G system it can correspond to an eNB
  • a 5G system it corresponds to an access network device in 5G, such as gNB.
  • core network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • a 5G system it corresponds to a core network equipment in 5G, such as AMF.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • AMF core network equipment in 5G, such as AMF.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems. Therefore, the access network equipment in FIG. 1 or FIG.
  • Figure 1 or Figure 2 can also correspond to the access network equipment and core network equipment in the future mobile communication system.
  • the equipment can also correspond to the core network equipment in the future mobile communication system.
  • Figure 1 or Figure 2 takes the access network device as a base station as an example.
  • the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
  • the terminal device supports at least one user identity, such as a first user identity and/or a second user identity.
  • user identity for example, the first user identity or the second user identity, etc.
  • user identity can correspond to SIM card or subscriber information or virtual SIM card or user identity (such as international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), etc.) .
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • TMSI temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • different "user identities” logically correspond to different communication entities served by the network side, such as terminal devices in 4G and 5G systems.
  • a terminal device that supports two user identities can be regarded as two communication entities to the network side.
  • the network side will recognize two terminal devices that support different SIM cards or different subscriber information as two different communication entities, and will also support multiple different communication entities.
  • the same terminal device with SIM card or multiple subscriber information is identified as multiple different communication entities, even in reality, the terminal device supporting multiple different SIM cards or multiple subscriber information is just one physical entity.
  • the SIM card can be understood as the key for the terminal device to access the mobile network.
  • the SIM card and its evolution are collectively referred to as the SIM card in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the SIM card may be an identification card of a global system for mobile communications (GSM) digital mobile phone user, which is used to store the user's identification code and key, and support the authentication of the user by the GSM system.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • the SIM card may also be a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), which may also be referred to as an upgraded SIM card.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • USB universal subscriber identity module
  • description will be made mainly by taking the "user identity" corresponding to the SIM card as an example.
  • a SIM card is installed in the terminal device, and it is considered that the terminal device supports a user identity.
  • a terminal device with two SIM cards installed supports two user identities. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the SIM card and the user identity.
  • more and more smart phones currently support the insertion of two SIM cards at the same time.
  • one SIM card is used for private business and the other SIM card is used for work; or, one SIM card is used for data business.
  • Another SIM card is used for voice services.
  • the two SIM cards in a mobile phone can belong to the same mobile operator or different mobile operators; they can belong to the same standard (standards include NR, LTE, wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA ), time division multiple access (TDMA 2000, or GSM, etc.) can also belong to different standards.
  • the terminal device with dual SIM cards can have one of the following three modes:
  • Passive mode or also known as DSSS mode: Although two SIM cards can be inserted, only one can be used at a time.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of the passive mode.
  • two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example.
  • USIM1 is working (or in RRC connected state (connected)), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data, but USIM2 cannot be used at this time; or, at time 2, USIM2 is working (or in RRC connected state), also That is, USIM2 can send and receive data, but USIM1 cannot be used at this time.
  • DSDS mode Two SIM cards share a set of transceivers. For the idle state, the transceiver needs to monitor the paging messages of the two cards. For example, the transceiver may use time division multiple (TDM) mode to monitor.
  • TDM time division multiple
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of the DSDS mode.
  • two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example.
  • USIM1 is working (or in RRC connected state), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data.
  • USIM2 can be in an idle state or inactive state (inactive); or, USIM2 is working (or in RRC connected state), That is, the USIM2 can send and receive data, and at this time, the USIM1 can be in an idle state or an inactive state.
  • the inactive state can also be called the deactivated state, or the deactivated state, etc.
  • DSDA mode Two SIM cards use their own transceivers. The two SIM cards can be in the RRC connection state at the same time, that is, the terminal device can receive and send data from the two SIM cards at the same time.
  • FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram of the DSDA mode.
  • two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example.
  • USIM1 When USIM1 is working (or when it enters the RRC connected state), that is, when USIM1 is sending and receiving data, USIM2 can also work, that is, USIM2 and USIM1 can be in the RRC connected state at the same time.
  • the following introduces the above three radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) states of the terminal device.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the three RRC states are: RRC connected state (connected state), RRC idle state (idle state) and inactive state (inactive state).
  • the inactive state can also be referred to as an inactive state or a deactivated state.
  • RRC connected state (or, can also be referred to as connected state for short.
  • connected state and “RRC connected state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the network, and it can Perform data transfer.
  • RRC idle state (or, can also be referred to as idle state for short.
  • idle state and “RRC idle state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, and the base station The context of the terminal device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the idle state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process.
  • Inactive state The terminal device entered the RRC connected state before, and then the base station releases the RRC connection, but the base station saves the context of the terminal device. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state again from the inactive state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection recovery process (or called the RRC connection re-establishment process). Compared with the RRC establishment process, the RRC recovery process has shorter time delay and lower signaling overhead. However, the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device has no data transmission, in order to save power, the terminal device enters an idle state or an inactive state. In this state, the terminal device needs to wake up at a certain position in a certain period to monitor whether the network is paging the terminal device. The location where the terminal device wakes up is the paging occasion (PO).
  • PO paging occasion
  • the downlink data of the terminal equipment arrives at the core network equipment.
  • the core network device sends a paging message to the base station, and the base station receives the paging message from the core network device.
  • the core network For a terminal device in an idle state, when downlink data arrives at the core network device (that is, the network wants to send data to the terminal device), the core network sends a paging message to multiple access network devices under the terminal device registration area to trigger multiple access network devices. Each base station sends a paging message on the air interface.
  • Figure 4 only takes one of the access network devices as an example.
  • the paging message may include a user equipment identification (UE ID).
  • the UE ID may be an S-temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device to the terminal device.
  • the paging message may also include a paging cycle (which may be recorded as T1) allocated by the core network to the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle may be a discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the access network device determines the paging opportunity of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can determine to initiate a paging to the terminal device and determine the paging timing.
  • a cell-level paging cycle (which can be denoted as T2) can be broadcast in the system message of the cell broadcast by the base station.
  • the access network device will allocate a paging cycle (which can be recorded as T3) to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may determine the paging occasion PO of the terminal device based on the UE ID, paging cycle, and paging configuration parameters of the cell.
  • the paging cycle used to determine the PO is the period with the smaller value of T1 and T2 (can be marked as T), and for the terminal device in the inactive state, it is used to determine the PO paging cycle It is the period with the smallest value among T1, T2, and T3 (can be denoted as T).
  • the cell paging configuration parameters broadcast in the system information of the cell may be as follows:
  • defaultPagingCycle is T2.
  • PF_offset the paging frame (PF) offset (which can be recorded as PF_offset) can be obtained, and N, where N is used to identify the number of PFs in a paging cycle, and Ns indicates a paging frame.
  • the number of POs in the call frame is T2.
  • the following takes the NR system as an example to describe the process of determining the paging occasion PO of the terminal device.
  • the paging frame PF in which the PO of the terminal device is located can be determined.
  • the PF where the PO is located can be determined by the following formula (1).
  • SFN represents the system frame number (system frame number), which is used to represent the frame number of the frame where the PF is located
  • PF_offset represents the offset of the PF
  • T represents the paging cycle of the terminal device
  • the unit is a frame
  • N represents a paging cycle
  • the number of inner PFs, T div N means that there is one PF every (T div N) consecutive frames
  • the UE_ID is S-TMSI mode 1024.
  • the values of PF_offset, T, and N can all come from the broadcast of the current cell or are related to the parameters broadcast by the current cell.
  • the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device in the PF can be determined.
  • the time domain position of the PO may also be referred to as the position of the PO.
  • the process of determining the position of the PO in the PF can be divided into the following steps a and b.
  • Step a Obtain the PO number i_s through the following formula (2):
  • i_s floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns (2)
  • Step b Obtain the time domain position of the PO according to the number of the PO. After obtaining the number of the PO, the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device can be obtained according to the configuration of the search space of the paging of the current cell.
  • the paging frame PF where the paging occasion PO of the terminal device is located can be determined according to the following formula (3):
  • the process of determining the position of the PO of the terminal device in the PF is similar to the NR system, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device can also determine the time domain position of the PO based on the UE ID, paging cycle, and cell paging configuration parameters applicable to all terminal devices in the current cell.
  • the access network device sends a paging message through the air interface, and the terminal device receives the paging message from the access network device.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the air interface.
  • the access network device is configured with a radio access network-based notification area (RNA)
  • the access network device will send paging at the paging occasion of the terminal device in the cell indicated by the RNA.
  • the access network device can send a paging message to other access network devices, and the other access network devices can use the air interface at the paging occasion of the terminal device. Send a paging message.
  • the paging message may carry the user equipment paging identity (UE paging identity), so that the terminal device receiving the paging message can identify whether the paging message is sent to itself.
  • UE paging identity user equipment paging identity
  • the terminal device can monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) on the determined PO to receive the paging message. After receiving the paging message and determining that the terminal device is paged, the terminal device will initiate a new RRC connection establishment process on the cell where it currently resides, or initiate an RRC connection recovery process to enter the RRC connection state.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the parameters used to determine the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device include the UE ID, the paging cycle, and the cell paging configuration parameters of the current cell.
  • the terminal device can register in different networks with the two user identities corresponding to the two SIM cards. For example, the terminal device registers on the first network with the identity of the first user corresponding to the first SIM card, and the terminal device registers on the second network with the identity of the second user corresponding to the second SIM card.
  • the first network will allocate the user equipment identification of the first user identity to the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the second network will allocate the user equipment identification of the second user identity to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device determines the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity in the paging cycle of the first user identity, and determines the time domain position of the PO of the second user equipment in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity may overlap with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity (including full overlap and partial overlap) Case.
  • the terminal device in DSDS mode since the terminal device can only listen to the paging message of one user identity at the PO location, if both the PO locations of the user identity have paging messages sent at this time, it will cause the terminal The device cannot receive the paging message of another user identity, that is, a paging conflict will occur between the first user identity and the second user identity, resulting in paging loss of one of the user identities, which will cause problems such as missed calls.
  • the terminal device is too late to adjust the radio frequency, which may result in the failure to receive the other user.
  • the paging message on the PO of the identity at this time, the first user identity and the second user identity will also have a paging conflict, resulting in page loss of one of the user identities, thereby causing a missed call problem.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity, and includes the first PO and the second PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity, that is, in the prior art, a user identity is in a paging cycle.
  • the first user identity includes two POs for the first user identity in one paging cycle.
  • the first user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 1 is installed.
  • the access network device may send a paging message of the first user identity of the terminal device on both the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device can choose to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or the second PO. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO. , So that when the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Helps to avoid missed call problems caused by paging loss.
  • the terminal device also supports the second user identity, and includes the third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the second user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 2 is installed.
  • the terminal device may only need to monitor one of the POs.
  • the terminal device since the first user identity of the terminal device includes two POs in one paging cycle, the terminal device always only needs to wake up and listen to the paging message in one PO of the paging cycle, that is, each user of the terminal device The identities only monitor the paging message once in their corresponding paging cycle, which helps the terminal device to save energy.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user, and the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user Message, and the terminal device does not monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO as the first user.
  • the paging of the second user identity can be monitored first, and the first user identity can be monitored on another PO that does not conflict with the first user identity.
  • User identity paging which can ensure that the paging messages of the two user identities will not be lost.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user, and the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user. Paging message, and the terminal device does not monitor the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user identity.
  • Fig. 5 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may install the SIM card 1 and the SIM card 2, wherein the terminal device has the first user identity after the SIM card 1 is installed, and has the second user identity after the SIM card 2 is installed.
  • the first user identity corresponding to SIM card 1 includes two POs (ie, the first PO and the second PO) in a paging cycle, where the first PO can be marked as "1" and the second PO It can be marked as "2”, and the second user identity corresponding to SIM card 2 includes a PO (that is, the third PO) in a paging cycle, which is marked as "1".
  • the time domain position of the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can monitor the paging message on the PO marked "2" as the first user (due to the overlap, the terminal device may not monitor the paging message on the PO marked "1" as the first user) to The second user identity monitors the paging message on the PO marked "1".
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on any PO in the paging cycle as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the first user identity to monitor the paging message of the first user identity.
  • the user identity monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO in the paging cycle.
  • the terminal device is in the first user identity as the first user.
  • One PO and the second PO appear on the earlier PO to monitor the paging message of the first user identity, or the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the PO calculated according to the UE ID as the first user Message, the terminal device listens to the paging message of the second user on the third PO as the second user.
  • the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that In the case of possible paging conflicts between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, when the terminal device monitors the paging message with the identity of the first user, it can select the time of the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user. Monitoring on the PO conflicting on the domain resources can avoid the loss of paging messages in the user identity of the terminal device.
  • the user identity corresponding to the SIM card residing in the NR cell can be preferentially selected to include at least two POs in the paging cycle.
  • it may be implemented by a terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first PO may be determined according to the first user equipment identity of the first user identity.
  • the first user equipment identification may be a user equipment identification assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user.
  • the first PO may be determined according to the process of determining the PO described above and the first user equipment identifier.
  • the first user equipment identifier is the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the other of the two POs may be determined based on the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the above-mentioned first user equipment identification.
  • the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification).
  • the second PO may be determined according to the procedure for determining the PO described above and the second user equipment identifier.
  • the second user equipment is identified as another temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the other PO of the two POs may be determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier.
  • the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification.
  • the first offset value may be "1", or "2", or others.
  • the second PO may be determined according to the procedure for determining the PO described above and the third user equipment identifier.
  • the third user equipment identity here is not the user equipment identity of the first user identity, but the user equipment identity obtained by offsetting the user equipment identity of the first user identity.
  • the other of the two POs such as the second PO
  • the other of the two POs may be determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and the second offset value, where the second offset value is used for Indicates the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value may be at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the second offset value is 1 radio frame
  • the second PO is in the next radio frame after the time domain position of the first PO
  • the position of the second PO in the next radio frame is the same as that of the first PO.
  • the position in the radio frame is the same.
  • the second offset value is 1 paging frame
  • the second PO is in the next paging frame after the time domain position of the first PO
  • the position of the second PO in the next paging frame is the same as that of the second PO in the next paging frame.
  • the position of the first PO in the paging frame is the same.
  • the second PO is in the next subframe after the time domain position of the first PO, and the position of the second PO in the next subframe is the same as that of the first PO.
  • the positions in the subframes are the same.
  • the second offset value is 1 radio frame and 1 subframe
  • the second PO is in the next radio frame after the time domain position where the first PO is located, and the second PO is in the next radio frame
  • the time domain position of the first PO is offset by 1 subframe from the time domain position of the first PO in the radio frame in which it is located.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
  • time domain positions of the two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity conflict with the time domain positions of the PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the paging cycle of the first user identity is an integer multiple of the paging cycle of the second user identity
  • the paging cycle of the first user identity is 64 radio frames
  • the paging of the second user identity The cycle is 32 radio frames.
  • the terminal device can send auxiliary information to the core network device as a user identity (such as the first user identity), and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the identity of the first user of the terminal device for determining The parameter of the paging occasion, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device for determining the paging occasion.
  • the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the S-TMSI of the second user identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity.
  • the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the S-TMSI of the first user's identity is the S-TMSI of the first user's identity.
  • the paging cycle of the second user identity may also include two POs, such as a third PO and a fourth PO.
  • two POs such as a third PO and a fourth PO.
  • the second PO may be determined according to the "user equipment identity #1 + first bias
  • the fourth PO may be determined according to the “user equipment identity #2- The first offset value" is determined.
  • the first PO and the second PO of the first user identity can be staggered with the third PO and the fourth PO of the second user identity as much as possible, so as to avoid paging conflicts between the first user identity and the second user
  • the first PO, the second PO, the third PO, and the fourth PO may be determined according to the process of determining the PO described above.
  • the second user identity of the terminal device may include one, two, or more than two POs in one paging cycle.
  • the access network device can send paging messages on both of the two or more POs, and the terminal device can use the first 2.
  • User identity choose to monitor the paging message on one of the POs. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application can help reduce the probability of paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can also install more than two SIM cards, and the corresponding terminal device also supports more than two user identities.
  • the terminal device supports three user identities and four user identities. Or more user identities, and can be registered in more than two networks, and each user identity can be registered in one network.
  • the embodiment of the present application mainly takes the terminal device supporting two user identities as an example, such as the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the terminal device supporting two user identities.
  • the specific implementation can refer to the related description of the terminal device supporting two user identities, and some simple things may be required. However, it is also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the first user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as a user (from the perspective of the protocol, it is a terminal device, for example, called the first user );
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the second user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as another user (for example, referred to as the second user).
  • the terminal device can be registered in the first network as the first user and registered in the second network as the second user.
  • the terminal device supports one user identity, which can also be described as the terminal device having one user identity.
  • the terminal device supports two user identities, which can also be described as the terminal device having two user identities.
  • the terminal device with the first user identity can be understood as “the first user identity of the terminal device", as indicated by these two descriptions.
  • the content is the same, these two descriptions can be interchanged.
  • the terminal device of the second user identity can be understood as “the second user identity of the terminal device”.
  • the content indicated by the two description methods is the same, and the two description methods can be interchanged.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, for example, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or the communication system shown in FIG. 2.
  • the three communication devices in the wireless communication system may have a wireless communication connection relationship.
  • One of the three communication devices may correspond to the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be configured in the terminal.
  • the chip in the device; the other communication device of the three communication devices may correspond to the access network device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be a chip configured in the access network device; the three communication devices
  • the other communication device in the device may correspond to the core network device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be a chip configured in the core network device.
  • pre-defined can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). , This application does not limit its specific implementation.
  • the “saving” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to being stored in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be separate settings, or may be integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • protocol in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • a paging process of a terminal device is taken as an example to describe the embodiments of the present application in detail. It can be understood that any terminal device in the wireless communication system or the chip configured in the terminal device can be paging based on the same method, and any access network device in the wireless communication system or configured in the access network device All the chips in the wireless communication system can perform paging based on the same method, and any core network device in the wireless communication system or the chip configured in the core network device can perform paging based on the same method. This application does not limit this.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a paging method according to an embodiment of this application.
  • the paging method shown in FIG. 6 includes steps 610 to 660.
  • the terminal device supports at least two user identities, such as a first user identity and a second user identity.
  • the terminal device interacts with the core network device and the access network device as the first user identity, and the paging cycle of the first user identity includes at least two POs as an example to describe the application
  • the core network device that interacts with the terminal device of the first user identity is a core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered as the first user.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the terminal device may also interact with the core network device and the access network device as the second user identity, and the paging cycle of the second user identity includes at least two POs.
  • the core network device that interacts with the terminal device of the second user identity is a core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered with the second user identity.
  • the process of the terminal device interacting with the network device as the second user can refer to the related description of the process of the terminal device interacting with the network device as the first user.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information to the core network device as the first user.
  • the core network device receives and saves the first instruction information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or is used to indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle, or is used to request the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the user identity includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
  • the core network device learns that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. At this time, in order to avoid paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device, the core network device may determine that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
  • the core network device is the core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered as the first user, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as a user, so "the core network device can determine the terminal device's
  • the first user identity includes at least two POs in a paging cycle", which can also be described as: "The core network device can determine that the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle".
  • the content indicated by the two description methods is the same and can be replaced with each other.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of its first user identity and the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity completely or partially overlap, or the interval is small (real-time domain position conflict)
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate that at least two user identities of the terminal device have a paging conflict. In this case, if the terminal device is in the idle state, the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state to send the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may notify the core network device of its at least two users No more paging conflicts with identities.
  • the access network device can restore the existing mechanism, that is, send a paging message on a PO in a paging cycle to reduce the consumption of paging resources.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity conflicts with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device, so that the access network
  • the device sends paging messages on at least two POs in a paging cycle, which can reduce the consumption of system paging resources.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports at least two user identities, regardless of whether the two user identities may have a paging conflict, the terminal device sends the first indication information to indicate the core network device.
  • the terminal device supports at least two user identities. For example, after the terminal device is turned on, if it is found that two SIM cards are installed in the terminal device, the terminal device can send a registration request message to the core network device under the first user identity corresponding to SIM card 1.
  • the registration request message may Carry the first indication information, which is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities.
  • the terminal device sends a registration request message to the core network device in the second user identity corresponding to the SIM card 2, and the registration request message may not carry indication information for indicating that the terminal device supports at least two user identities.
  • the paging cycle of the second user identity of the terminal device may include only one PO.
  • the terminal device supports at least two user identities regardless of whether the paging of the at least two user identities conflicts, it is possible to realize that there is no need to frequently Notify the network device whether it is necessary to send paging messages on at least two POs, thereby reducing the signaling overhead of the system, and is easier to implement.
  • the first indication information may be used to request the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identifier for the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the additional user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the core network device to request the core network device Assign an additional user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device. Or, it can also be described as requesting the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
  • the core network After the core network receives the first indication information, it can learn that the terminal device needs at least two POs in a paging cycle, that is, it can be inferred that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. Paging conflicts may occur for user identity.
  • the core network device may assign an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
  • the additional user equipment identification may be the second user equipment identification shown above.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the core network device through a non-access stratum (Non-access stratum, NAS) message.
  • the NAS message may carry the first indication information.
  • the NAS message may be a NAS registration request message.
  • the parameters constituting the NAS message may include at least one of terminal identification, terminal capability, registration type, protocol data unit (PDU) session identification, data network name DNN, or other parameters.
  • the registration type may include the registration type of paging conflict. That is to say, the registration type of the paging conflict at this time may be an example of the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the access network device through an RRC message (such as an RRC establishment complete message). Then, the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device through a communication interface (such as an N2 interface) between the access network device and the core network device. As an example, the access network device may send an initial UE message to the core network through the N2 interface, and the initial UE message carries the first indication information.
  • RRC message such as an RRC establishment complete message
  • the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device through a communication interface (such as an N2 interface) between the access network device and the core network device.
  • the access network device may send an initial UE message to the core network through the N2 interface, and the initial UE message carries the first indication information.
  • the core network device may also send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may receive the second user equipment identifier, the first offset value, or the second offset value from the core network as the first user identity.
  • the core network device may send a NAS registration response message to the terminal device, which includes the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
  • the second user equipment identifier, the first offset value, and the second offset value can be referred to the above description, and for brevity, the details are not repeated here.
  • the core network device sends second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  • the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO.
  • the first PO and the second PO can refer to the above description.
  • the second indication information may include the first user equipment identification and the second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, where the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO.
  • the first user equipment identification can be brought into the above formula (1) to formula (3) to determine the first PO
  • the second user equipment identification can be brought into the above formula (1) to formula ( 3) to determine the second PO, but the embodiment of the application is not limited to this.
  • the second indication information includes the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device and the first offset value, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, the first offset value is used to determine the second PO.
  • the second PO may be determined based on the first user equipment identification and the first offset value.
  • the third user equipment identifier (for example, the sum or difference between the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value) may be obtained according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. Then, the third user equipment identifier is brought into the above formula (1) to formula (3) to determine the second PO, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the second indication information includes the first user equipment identifier and the second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second indication information may be used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or used to indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
  • the access network device can determine to send a paging message to the terminal device on at least two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity according to the second indication information.
  • the access network device when it receives the second indication information, it can determine, according to the content in the second indication information, that the terminal device sends a paging message on the above at least two POs. Further, the access network device may also determine the first PO and the second PO of the at least two POs according to the content in the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may be explicit indication information or implicit indication information.
  • the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the access network device, it means that the core network device sends the second indication information to the access network device.
  • the access network device can determine that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
  • the access network device is not necessarily the access network device in step 610.
  • the terminal device has been handed over from the cell of the access network device in step 610 to the cell of the access network device in step 620.
  • the core network device may send the second indication information to the access network device through a paging message or an initial context establishment request message. Specifically, it will be described in detail below.
  • the access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
  • the access network device may determine the time domain location of the first PO and the second PO according to the second indication information.
  • the access network device may determine the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user according to the first user equipment identifier assigned by the core network device to the first user identity of the terminal device. Further, the access network device may determine the second PO according to a preset pre-defined (for example, pre-stored by the access network device), or a first offset value or a second offset value pre-defined by a protocol.
  • a preset pre-defined for example, pre-stored by the access network device
  • the process of determining the first PO and the second PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device may determine the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user according to the first user equipment identifier assigned by the core network device to the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may be pre-defined according to presets (such as pre-stored by the terminal device), or the first offset value or the second offset value may be pre-defined by the protocol, or received from the core network device as the first user
  • the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value that comes, determines the second PO.
  • the process of determining the first PO and the second PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message on which PO of the first PO or the second PO of the first user identity, depending on which PO is not in the time domain with the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • Conflict in location please refer to the above description. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, by setting the first PO and the second PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, When the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the second user identity to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple users of the terminal device
  • the identity has the problem of paging message loss.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the paging message is monitored on the first PO or the second PO.
  • FIG. 7 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 7.
  • the various steps in Fig. 7 may be performed in a different order from that presented in Fig. 7, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 7 are to be performed.
  • a terminal device sends first indication information to a core network device.
  • the core network device receives the first indication information.
  • step 701 can be referred to the description of step 601 in FIG.
  • the core network device saves the foregoing first indication information.
  • the core network device may additionally allocate a new user equipment identity to the terminal device according to the first indication information, that is, the first user identity of the terminal device has two user equipment identities.
  • the user equipment identifier may be S-TMSI.
  • the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device and the access network device may determine the second PO according to the first offset value and the second offset value.
  • the core network device may not send the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
  • the first offset value or the second offset value may also be defined in advance, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • step 703 and the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value, please refer to the relevant description above. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first indication information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the first indication information, the terminal device enters the idle state from the RRC connected state.
  • the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged.
  • the core network may determine that the terminal device needs to be paged when the downlink data of the terminal device arrives.
  • the paging to the terminal device is triggered by the core network device. After the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged, it sends a paging message to the access network device, that is, step 705 is executed.
  • the core network device sends a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message carries second indication information.
  • the access network device receives the second indication information. Since the paging message is sent through the NG interface between the core network device and the access network device, the paging message may also be called an NG paging message.
  • the paging message may carry the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • logo That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
  • step 620 in FIG. 6 refers to the description of step 620 in FIG. 6, and for brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • the access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO, and monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
  • the paging message since the paging message is transmitted on the air interface between the access network device and the terminal device, the paging message may also be referred to as an air interface paging message.
  • steps 706 to 709 can refer to the descriptions of 630 to 670 in FIG.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices.
  • the user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the paging message is monitored on the first PO or the second PO.
  • FIG. 8 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 8.
  • the various steps in FIG. 8 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 8, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 8 are to be performed.
  • a terminal device sends first indication information to a core network device.
  • the core network device receives the first indication information.
  • step 801 refers to the description of step 601 in FIG. 6, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the core network device saves the foregoing first indication information.
  • the core network device may additionally allocate a new user equipment identity to the terminal device according to the first indication information, that is, the first user identity of the terminal device has two user equipment identities.
  • the user equipment identifier may be S-TMSI.
  • the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  • step 803 can be referred to the description of 703 in FIG.
  • the core network device sends an initial context establishment request message to the first access network device, where the initial context establishment request message carries second indication information.
  • the first access network device in step 804 is the current serving access network device of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • steps 801 to 803 and step 804 are relatively independent processes, that is, the first access network device and the terminal device in step 804 perform steps 801 to 803 corresponding to the first access
  • the network access devices can be the same access network device or different access network devices.
  • the first user identity of the terminal device enters the idle state after going through the above steps 801 to 803. Then, the terminal device will send data to the connected state with the first user device. At this time, the core network device sends an initial context establishment request message to the current serving access network device of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the initial context establishment request message carries the second indication information.
  • the core network device does not send the second indication information to the access network device through a paging message, but, for example, through the initial context establishment request message when the terminal device enters the connected state. Carry to the access network equipment.
  • the initial context establishment request message may carry the first user equipment identity and the second user equipment identity of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • User equipment identification That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
  • the core network may also carry the second indication information in other messages and send it to the access network device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the first access network device sends an initial context establishment response message to the core network device.
  • the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first indication information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the first indication information, the terminal device enters an inactive (inactive) state from the RRC connected state.
  • the first access network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged.
  • the first access network device may determine that the terminal device needs to be paged when the downlink data of the terminal device arrives.
  • the first access network device needs to page the terminal device to enter the connected state. That is, for the terminal device in the inactive state, the air interface paging message is triggered by the access network device itself.
  • the first access network device sends a paging message to the second access network device, which carries second indication information.
  • the paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the first access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and may also be referred to as an anchor point access network device.
  • the second access network device may also be referred to as an adjacent access network device of the anchor point access network device.
  • the anchor access sends a paging message to the neighboring access network device.
  • the paging message contains second indication information for instructing the neighboring access network device to report to the terminal of the first user identity on at least two POs of the first user identity.
  • the device sends a paging message.
  • the paging message in step 807 since the paging message in step 807 is transmitted through the Xn interface between the access networks, the paging message may also be referred to as an Xn paging message.
  • the paging message may carry the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • logo That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
  • the first access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
  • the second access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
  • the terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO, and monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
  • the first access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
  • the first access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
  • the second access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
  • the second access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
  • the second access network device determines the first PO and the second PO, the second access network device sends a paging message on the first PO or sends a paging message on the second PO, and the terminal device is in the first PO.
  • the PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the second access network device, determines the first PO and the second PO with the first access network device, and the first access network device sends the paging message on the first PO or
  • the process of sending a paging message on the second PO and that the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first access network device on the first PO or the second PO is similar.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. A paging conflict occurred in the user identity.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device recognizes that there is a paging conflict between the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device may use one of the user identities to send auxiliary information to the core network device, and the auxiliary information is used to indicate The parameter of the first user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging occasion, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging occasion.
  • the core network device After the core network device receives the auxiliary information, it can reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity or the second user identity of the terminal device based on the auxiliary information, and the core network device can ensure that the new allocation is based on the auxiliary information.
  • the paging occasion derived from the user equipment identifier of the user equipment no longer conflicts with the paging occasion of another user identity, thereby avoiding the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the parameters used to determine the paging occasion include one or more of paging cycle, paging resource configuration, and user equipment identification.
  • the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the S-TMSI of the second user identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity.
  • the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
  • the S-TMSI of the first user's identity is the S-TMSI of the first user's identity.
  • Fig. 9 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may install SIM card 1 and SIM card 2.
  • the old PO included in the first user identity corresponding to the SIM card 1 in a paging cycle and the PO of the second user identity in a paging cycle overlap in the time domain position.
  • the terminal device may send auxiliary information to the core network device as the first user identity, and the core network device may reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
  • a new PO can be determined in the paging cycle of the first user identity, the time domain position of the new PO and the time domain position of the PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity Does not overlap.
  • the terminal device can monitor the paging message on the PO marked as new as the first user, and monitor the paging message on the PO marked as the paging cycle as the second user, thereby avoiding the identity of the first user and A paging conflict occurs in the identity of the second user.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the paging message is monitored on the new PO.
  • FIG. 10 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 10.
  • the various steps in Fig. 10 may be performed in a different order from that shown in Fig. 10, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 7 are to be performed.
  • the terminal device determines that a paging conflict occurs between the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device.
  • the manner in which the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the core network device may be similar to the manner in which the first indication information is sent.
  • the message carrying the auxiliary information and the message carrying the first indication information may be of the same type. For details, please refer to the above description. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the core network device reassigns the fourth user equipment identifier to the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device sends the fourth user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
  • the manner in which the core network device sends the fourth user equipment identification to the terminal device may be similar to the manner in which the second user equipment identification, the first offset value, or the second offset value is sent.
  • the core network device sends the fourth user equipment identification to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the aforementioned auxiliary information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the auxiliary information, the terminal device enters the idle state from the RRC connected state.
  • the core network device determines to page the terminal device.
  • step 704 in FIG. 7 For details, please refer to the description in step 704 in FIG. 7, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the core network device sends a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message carries the fourth user equipment identifier.
  • the access network device determines a new PO of the first user identity according to the fourth user equipment identifier.
  • the terminal device determines a new PO of the first user identity according to the fourth user equipment identifier, and monitors the paging message on the new PO.
  • the process of determining the new PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the access network device sends a paging message on the new PO.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first user identity parameter for determining the paging occasion to the core network device, so that the core network
  • the device can reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity, so that when the terminal device listens to a paging message in the idle state as the first user identity, it can be in the time domain resource of the PO in the paging cycle without the identity of the second user.
  • the conflicting new PO is monitored on the new PO, thereby avoiding paging conflicts of multiple user identities of the terminal device.
  • the access network device when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the inactive state, the paging message can also be monitored on the new PO. Different from the first user identity of the terminal device in the idle state, in the inactive state, the access network device initiates paging to the terminal device. In addition, before the terminal device enters the inactive state, the fourth user equipment identifier may be sent to the access network device through the initial context establishment request. In addition, the access network device may also send an Xn paging message to the adjacent access network device, which contains a fourth user equipment identifier, which is used to instruct the adjacent network device to determine a new PO based on the fourth user equipment identifier. The adjacent access network device can also send an air interface paging message to the terminal device on the new PO. Specifically, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the inactive state, the flow of monitoring the paging message can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1100 provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • the device 1100 may also be referred to as a paging device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be a core network device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a core network device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be an access network device, or a chip or circuit, for example, a chip or circuit that can be provided in an access network device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may include a processing unit 1110 (that is, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1130.
  • the processing unit 1110 may also be referred to as a determining unit.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
  • the device may further include a storage unit 1120.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store instructions.
  • the storage unit may also be used to store data or information.
  • the storage unit 1120 may be implemented by a memory.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the access network device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1110, the storage unit 1120, and the transceiver unit 1130 may communicate with each other through internal connection paths, and transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1110 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1120 to control the transceiver unit 1130 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method. Steps for terminal equipment or core network equipment or access network equipment.
  • the storage unit 1120 may be integrated in the processing unit 1110, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1110.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 includes a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 includes an input interface and an output interface.
  • the function of the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (such as a terminal device, or an access network device, or a core network device) provided in the embodiments of the present application. That is to say, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiving unit 1130 is stored in the storage unit 1120.
  • the general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiving unit 1130 by executing the code in the storage unit 1120.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit provided in the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine that the first user identity includes the first paging occasion PO and the first paging opportunity in a paging cycle of the first user identity.
  • the second PO, the first PO and the second PO are used for the access network device to page the device.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user.
  • the device 1100 also supports a second user identity, and the device 1100 includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity.
  • the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user on the second PO as the first user.
  • the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity.
  • the device When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the device operates in the first user as the first user.
  • the PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to receive the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value from the core network device as the first user identity .
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to send first indication information to the core network device as the first user identity, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the apparatus supports at least two user identities, or indicate that the The first user identity of the device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to use the The first user identity sends the first indication information to the core network device.
  • each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be a core network device, or a chip or circuit provided in the core network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to obtain first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two users
  • the identity, or indicating the identity of the first user of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: send a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and The paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is specifically configured to send an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  • the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  • each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the core network device in the above method.
  • the details are omitted. Description.
  • the apparatus 1100 may be an access network device, or a chip or circuit provided in the access network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to receive second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the device is in the terminal A paging message is sent to the terminal device on at least two paging occasions PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the device.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine a first PO and a second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO;
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
  • the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
  • the time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value.
  • the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to receive a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, so The paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive the paging message from a core network device.
  • the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive the paging message from a second access network device, where the second access network device stores the context of the first user identity of the terminal device The access network equipment.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to: send a paging message to a third access network device, where the device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message The paging message is used to instruct the third access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identity and a second user equipment identity of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identity is used to determine the first user equipment identity.
  • a PO, the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
  • the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  • the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
  • the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the access network device in the foregoing method.
  • the access network device in the foregoing method.
  • it is omitted. Its detailed description.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1200 provided by this application.
  • the terminal device 1200 can perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. For example, it is used to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 12 only shows a memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data.
  • the processor in FIG. 12 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected by technologies such as a bus.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and the various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and control circuit with the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit 1210 of the terminal device 1200
  • the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit 1220 of the terminal device 1200.
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a transceiving unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220.
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device 1300 provided by an embodiment of the application, which can be used to implement the access device (for example, the first access network device, the second access network device, or the third access network device) in the above method Access network equipment) function.
  • the access network device 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as digital units, digital units, DU) 1320.
  • RRU 1310 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312.
  • the RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the signaling messages described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment.
  • the BBU1320 part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU (processing unit) 1320 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), and may also support different connections. Enter the standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 1320 further includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322.
  • the memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 1321 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment and so on.
  • the processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of part 1320 and part 1310 can be realized by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip Realization, the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices, the program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the related functions of the base station.
  • the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
  • FIG. 13 the structure of the access network device illustrated in FIG. 13 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other types of base station structures that may appear in the future.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), and dedicated integration Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Take memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • the foregoing embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the steps performed by the terminal device in any of the above embodiments or the steps performed by the core network device are implemented. Or the steps performed by the access network equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product that, when executed by a computer, implements the steps performed by the terminal device in any of the above embodiments, or the steps performed by the core network device, or the steps performed by the access network device. step.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a system chip, which includes a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the processing unit may be a processor, for example.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, a communication interface, an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, or the like.
  • the processing unit can execute computer instructions so that the chip in the communication device executes the steps performed by the terminal device provided in the embodiments of the present application, or the steps performed by the core network device, or the steps performed by the access network device.
  • the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned core network equipment, access network equipment, and terminal equipment.
  • various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a paging method and apparatus. The paging method comprises: a terminal device determining that a first user identity comprises a first paging occasion (PO) and a second PO in a paging cycle for the first user identity, wherein the first PO and the second PO are used for paging the terminal device by means of an access network device; and the terminal device then monitoring, as the first user identity and at the first PO or at the second PO, a paging message of the first user identity. Therefore, in the embodiments of the present application, a first PO and a second PO are provided in a paging cycle of a first user identity of a terminal device, and an access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO, such that when monitoring, as the first user identity, the paging message, the terminal device can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby being beneficial for avoiding a paging loss, and further being beneficial for avoiding the problem of missed calls caused by the paging loss.

Description

寻呼的方法和装置Method and device for paging 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体的,涉及通信领域中的寻呼的方法和装置。This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and device for paging in the communication field.
背景技术Background technique
随着通信技术的发展,很多终端设备(如手机)都具备支持多个用户身份模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡的功能。以终端设备支持两个SIM卡为例,有多种可能的实现方式,例如双卡单待(dual SIM single standby,DSSS)模式、双卡双待(dual SIM dual standby,DSDS)模式、或双卡双激活(dual SIM dual active,DSDA)模式。With the development of communication technology, many terminal devices (such as mobile phones) have the function of supporting multiple subscriber identification module (SIM) cards. Taking the terminal device supporting two SIM cards as an example, there are many possible implementation methods, such as dual SIM single standby (DSSS) mode, dual SIM dual standby (DSDS) mode, or dual Card dual active (dual SIM dual active, DSDA) mode.
在DSDS模式下,终端设备中的两个SIM卡共享一套收发机。对于空闲态(idle)的终端设备而言,需要监听两张SIM的寻呼消息。作为示例,可以采用时分复用(time division multiple,TDM)来进行监听寻呼消息。具体而言,处于空闲态(idle)或去激活态(inactive)的终端设备,需要以一定的周期在一定的时间位置醒来,监听网络是否有寻呼,该时间位置可以称为终端设备的寻呼时机(paging occasion,PO)。In the DSDS mode, the two SIM cards in the terminal device share a set of transceivers. For an idle terminal device, it is necessary to monitor the paging messages of the two SIMs. As an example, time division multiplexing (TDM) may be used to monitor paging messages. Specifically, a terminal device in an idle or inactive state needs to wake up at a certain time position in a certain period to monitor whether there is a paging on the network. This time position can be called the terminal equipment's Paging occasion (paging occasion, PO).
对于DSDS模式终端设备,有可能其两张SIM卡分别对应的PO的时域位置相同或有重叠,即存在寻呼冲突。由于终端设备在一个PO上只能监听一张SIM对应的寻呼消息,可能会出现另一张SIM没有接收到寻呼消息的情况。For the DSDS mode terminal device, it is possible that the time domain positions of the PO corresponding to the two SIM cards are the same or overlap, that is, there is a paging conflict. Since the terminal device can only monitor the paging message corresponding to one SIM on one PO, it may happen that the other SIM does not receive the paging message.
因此,亟需一种寻呼方案,来解决DSDS模式的终端设备在寻呼冲突时如何进行寻呼问题。Therefore, there is an urgent need for a paging solution to solve the problem of how the terminal device in the DSDS mode performs paging when a paging conflict occurs.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种寻呼的方法和装置,能够有助于避免DSDS模式的终端设备出现寻呼丢失。The present application provides a paging method and device, which can help avoid page loss in DSDS mode terminal equipment.
第一方面,提供了一种寻呼的方法,该方法适用于终端设备,该终端设备支持第一用户身份。该方法由终端设备或终端设备中的芯片执行。下面以该方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。In the first aspect, a paging method is provided, which is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity. The method is executed by the terminal device or the chip in the terminal device. In the following, the method is executed by a terminal device as an example for description.
在该方法中,终端设备确定第一用户身份在所述第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一寻呼时机PO和第二PO,该第一PO和第二PO用于接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备。然后,终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO或在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。In this method, the terminal device determines that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used to access the network The device pages the terminal device. Then, the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user identity.
因此,本申请实施例通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,且接入网设备在该第一PO和第二PO上均发送寻呼消息,使得终端设备以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择在第一PO上监听该寻呼消息,或者在第二PO上监听该寻呼消息,从而有助于避免寻呼丢失,进一步的,有助于避免寻呼丢失导致的漏话问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO. , So that when the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Yes, it helps to avoid missed call problems caused by page loss.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,终端设备还支持第二用户身份,终端设备在该第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the terminal device further supports a second user identity, and the terminal device includes a third PO in a paging cycle of the second user identity.
当所述第一PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。或When the time domain position of the first PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user. or
当所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。When the time domain position of the second PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user.
即当冲突发生时,既然第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内有两个PO,则可以优先监听第二用户身份的寻呼,在第一用户身份的不冲突的另一个PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼,这样能确保两个用户身份的寻呼消息都不会丢失。That is, when a conflict occurs, since the first user identity has two POs in a paging cycle, the paging of the second user identity can be monitored first, and the first user identity can be monitored on another PO that does not conflict with the first user identity. User identity paging, which can ensure that the paging messages of the two user identities will not be lost.
或者,当所述第一PO的时域位置和所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置均不重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上或所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息。Or, when the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device is in the position of the first user as the first user. The first PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message.
比如,终端设备以第一用户身份在第一PO上和第二PO中出现较早的PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息,或者终端设备以第一用户身份在根据UE ID计算出的那个PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息。For example, the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO and the second PO in the first PO as the first user identity, or the terminal device listens to the paging message of the first user identity as the first user identity according to the UE ID calculation. The paging message of the first user identity is monitored on that PO.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得在第一用户身份与第二用户身份可能出现寻呼冲突的情况下,终端设备在以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that In the case of possible paging conflicts between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, when the terminal device monitors the paging message with the identity of the first user, it can select the time of the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user. Monitoring on the PO conflicting on the domain resources can avoid the loss of paging messages in the user identity of the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
一个示例,第一用户设备标识可以是终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络中时,网络为该终端设备分配的用户设备标识。一个示例,第二用户设备标识可以是核心网设备额外分配给终端设备的第一用户身份的不同于第一用户设备标识的一个用户设备标识(即第一用户身份被核心网设备分配了两个用户设备标识)。As an example, the first user equipment identification may be a user equipment identification assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user. As an example, the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification).
或者,所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。其中,第一偏移值可以用于指示第二PO对应的第三用户设备标识相对所述第一用户设备标识的偏移量。也就是说,可以先对第一用户设备标识进行第一偏移值的偏移,获取第三用户设备标识,然后,根据第三用户设备标识,确定第二PO。或者Alternatively, the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. The first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier. In other words, the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。同时,第二用户设备标识也可以包括S-TMSI。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity. At the same time, the second user equipment identifier may also include S-TMSI.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述终端设备还可以以所述第一用户身份从核心网设备接收所述第二用户设备标识,或者,所述第一偏移值,或者所述第二偏移值。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the terminal device may also receive the second user equipment identifier from the core network device as the first user identity, or the first offset Value, or the second offset value.
一些可能的实现方式中,可以预先定义第一偏移值或第二偏移值。示例性的,终端设备或接入网设备中可以预先存储第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,或者由协议定义第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some possible implementations, the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined. Exemplarily, the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
因此,本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据上述第二用户设备标识,或者第一偏移值,或者第二偏移值确定第二PO。Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may determine the second PO according to the foregoing second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
一些可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以以一个用户身份(比如第一用户身份)向核心网设备发送辅助信息,该辅助信息用于指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数,和/或所述终端设备的第二用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数。核心网设备接收到该辅助信息之后,可以根据该辅助信息,确定上述第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值。In some possible implementations, the terminal device may send auxiliary information to the core network device as a user identity (such as the first user identity), and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the identity of the first user of the terminal device for determining paging The parameter of the timing, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging timing. After receiving the auxiliary information, the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information.
因此,核心网设备能基于该辅助信息来确保基于第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值得出的第二PO不再与第二用户身份的PO发生冲突,从而避免第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,终端设备还可以以所述第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the terminal device may also send first indication information to the core network device as the first user, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device Support at least two user identities, or indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
一种可能的情况,在终端设备支持至少两个用户身份时,不管这两个用户身份是否可能会发生寻呼冲突,终端设备均发送该第一指示信息,用于向核心网设备指示该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份。In a possible situation, when the terminal device supports at least two user identities, regardless of whether the two user identities may have a paging conflict, the terminal device sends the first indication information to indicate the terminal to the core network device The device supports at least two user identities.
因此,通过在终端设备在支持至少两个用户身份,而不管该至少两个用户身份的寻呼是否冲突的情况下,以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,能够实现不需要经常通知网络设备是否需要在至少两个PO上均发送寻呼消息,从而降低系统的信令开销,并且比较容易实现。Therefore, by sending the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device under the condition that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, regardless of whether the paging of the at least two user identities conflict The network equipment is often notified whether it needs to send paging messages on at least two POs, so as to reduce the signaling overhead of the system and is easier to implement.
一种可能的情况,当所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份向所述核心网设备发送所述第一指示信息。In a possible situation, when the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity of the terminal device, the terminal device is Sending the first indication information to the core network device by the first user identity.
可选的,当终端设备的至少两个用户身份不再发生寻呼冲突时,比如终端设备更换了服务小区(比如执行了小区重选)之后,终端设备可以通知核心网设备其至少两个用户身份不再发生寻呼冲突。此时,接入网设备可以恢复现有机制,即在一个寻呼周期内的一个PO上发送寻呼消息,以减少寻呼资源的消耗。Optionally, when at least two user identities of the terminal device no longer have a paging conflict, for example, after the terminal device changes a serving cell (for example, after performing a cell reselection), the terminal device may notify the core network device of its at least two users No more paging conflicts with identities. At this time, the access network device can restore the existing mechanism, that is, send a paging message on a PO in a paging cycle to reduce the consumption of paging resources.
因此,通过终端设备在确定第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的PO的时域位置冲突时,以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,使得接入网设备在一个寻呼周期的至少两个PO上均发送寻呼消息,能够降低系统寻呼资源的消耗。Therefore, when the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity conflicts with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device, so that the access network The device sends paging messages on at least two POs in a paging cycle, which can reduce the consumption of system paging resources.
一些可能的情况,第一指示信息可以用于请求核心网设备为终端设备的第一用户身份分配一个额外的用户设备标识。In some possible situations, the first indication information may be used to request the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device.
核心网在接收到第一指示信息后,可以获知该终端设备在一个寻呼周期内需要至少两个PO,即可以推测出该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或者该终端设备的至少两个用户身份可能会发生寻呼冲突。此时,为了避免该终端设备多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突,核心网设备可以为该终端设备分配一个额外的用户设备标识。After the core network receives the first indication information, it can learn that the terminal device needs at least two POs in a paging cycle, that is, it can be inferred that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. Paging conflicts may occur for user identity. At this time, in order to avoid paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device, the core network device may assign an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
第二方面,提供了一种寻呼的方法,该方法适用于核心网设备。该方法由核心网设备或终端设备中的芯片执行。下面以该方法由核心网设备执行为例进行描述。In the second aspect, a paging method is provided, which is suitable for core network equipment. This method is executed by a chip in a core network device or terminal device. In the following, the method is executed by the core network device as an example for description.
在该方法中,所述核心网设备获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。In this method, the core network device obtains first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicate a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device At least two PO are included.
所述核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The core network device sends second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
因此,本申请实施例通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置至少两个PO,且接入网设备在该至少两个PO上均发送寻呼消息,使得终端设备以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择在其中一个PO上监听该寻呼消息(比如选择在没有与该终端设备支持的第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听寻呼消息),从而有助于避免寻呼丢失,进一步的,有助于避免寻呼丢失导致的漏话问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, at least two POs are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends paging messages on the at least two POs, so that the terminal device is When a user identity monitors a paging message, it can choose to monitor the paging message on one of the POs (for example, select a PO in a paging cycle that does not have a second user identity supported by the terminal device that conflicts on time domain resources. Paging messages are monitored on the PO), thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further, helping to avoid the problem of missed calls caused by page loss.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该核心网设备可以向所述接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述接入网设备对所述终端设备进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息中包括所述第二指示信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the core network device may send a paging message to the access network device, and the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to respond to the The terminal device performs paging, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在idle态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. The user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该核心网设备可以向所述接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the core network device may send an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information .
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在inactive态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. A paging conflict occurred in the user identity.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,上述至少两个PO中包括第一PO和第二PO。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the aforementioned at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO.
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。或The second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第 一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,其特征在于,还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, it is characterized in that it further includes:
所述核心网设备向所述终端设备发送所述第二用户设备标识,或所述第一偏移值,或所述第二偏移值。The core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
一些可能的实现方式中,核心网设备可以接收终端设备发送的辅助信息,该辅助信息用于指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数,和/或所述终端设备的第二用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数。核心网设备接收到该辅助信息之后,可以根据该辅助信息,确定上述第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值。In some possible implementation manners, the core network device may receive auxiliary information sent by the terminal device, and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the parameters of the first user identity of the terminal device for determining the paging occasion, and/or the terminal device The parameter of the second user identity of the device used to determine the paging occasion. After receiving the auxiliary information, the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information.
因此,核心网设备能基于该辅助信息来确保基于第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值得出的第二PO不再与第二用户身份的PO发生冲突,从而避免第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
第三方面,提供了一种寻呼的方法,该方法适用于第一接入网设备。该方法由第一接入网设备或第一接入网设备中的芯片执行。下面以该方法由第一接入网设备执行为例进行描述。In the third aspect, a paging method is provided, which is applicable to the first access network device. The method is executed by the first access network device or a chip in the first access network device. In the following, the method is executed by the first access network device as an example for description.
在该方法中,第一接入网设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示所述第一接入网设备在终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内的至少两个寻呼时机PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。In this method, the first access network device receives second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first access network device is at least two times within a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device. A paging occasion PO sends a paging message to the terminal device.
第一接入网设备还可以确定所述寻呼周期内的第一PO和第二PO,其中,所述至少两个PO包括所述第一PO和所述第二PO。The first access network device may also determine the first PO and the second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO.
第一接入网设备在所述第一PO和所述第二PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The first access network device sends a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
因此,本申请实施例通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,且接入网设备在该第一PO和第二PO上均发送寻呼消息,使得终端设备以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择在第一PO上监听该寻呼消息,或者在第二PO上监听该寻呼消息,从而有助于避免寻呼丢失,进一步的,有助于避免寻呼丢失导致的漏话问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO. , So that when the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Yes, it helps to avoid missed call problems caused by page loss.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification.
一个示例,第一用户设备标识可以是终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络中时,网络 为该终端设备分配的用户设备标识。一个示例,第二用户设备标识可以是核心网设备额外分配给终端设备的第一用户身份的不同于第一用户设备标识的一个用户设备标识(即第一用户身份被核心网设备分配了两个用户设备标识)。As an example, the first user equipment identifier may be a user equipment identifier assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user. As an example, the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification).
或者,所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。其中,第一偏移值可以用于指示第二PO对应的第三用户设备标识相对所述第一用户设备标识的偏移量。也就是说,可以先对第一用户设备标识进行第一偏移值的偏移,获取第三用户设备标识,然后,根据第三用户设备标识,确定第二PO。Alternatively, the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. The first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier. In other words, the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification.
或者,所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。Alternatively, the time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain of the second PO The offset of the domain position relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
一些可能的实现方式中,可以预先定义第一偏移值或第二偏移值。示例性的,终端设备或接入网设备中可以预先存储第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,或者由协议定义第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some possible implementations, the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined. Exemplarily, the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
因此,本申请实施例中,第一接入网设备可以根据上述第二用户设备标识,或者第一偏移值,或者第二偏移值确定第二PO。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the first access network device may determine the second PO according to the foregoing second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,该第一接入网设备可以接收寻呼消息,该寻呼消息用于指示所述第一接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,该寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first access network device may receive a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to contact the terminal device The first user identity performs paging, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当终端设备进入idle态时,该所述第一接入网设备从核心网设备接收所述寻呼消息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, when the terminal device enters the idle state, the first access network device receives the paging message from the core network device.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在idle态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. The user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当终端设备进入inactive态时,该第一接入网设备可以从第二接入网设备接收所述寻呼消息,所述第二接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, when the terminal device enters the inactive state, the first access network device may receive the paging message from the second access network device, and the second The access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当终端设备进入inactive态之前,所述第一接入网设备可以从所述核心网设备接收初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, before the terminal device enters the inactive state, the first access network device may receive an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, and the initial context The establishment request message includes the second indication information.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当终端设备进入inactive态时,所述第一接入网设备还可以向第三接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述第一接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第三接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示 信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, when the terminal device enters the inactive state, the first access network device may also send a paging message to the third access network device, and the first The access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message is used to instruct the third access network device to contact the terminal device for the first Paging with a user identity, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在inactive态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. The user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。或With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移值。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,或子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
第四方面,提供了一种寻呼的装置,用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体的,该装置包括用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。In a fourth aspect, a paging device is provided, which is used to execute the foregoing first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect. Specifically, the device includes a module for executing the foregoing first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
该装置支持第一用户身份,所述装置包括确定单元和接收单元。The device supports a first user identity, and the device includes a determining unit and a receiving unit.
确定单元,用于确定第一用户身份在所述第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一寻呼时机PO和第二PO,所述第一PO和所述第二PO用于接入网设备寻呼所述装置。The determining unit is configured to determine that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used for access The network equipment pages the device.
接收单元,用于以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO或在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。The receiving unit is configured to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述装置还支持第二用户身份,所述装置在所述第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the device further supports a second user identity, and the device includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity.
当所述第一PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。或When the time domain position of the first PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user on the second PO as the first user. or
当所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。或When the time domain position of the second PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity. or
当所述第一PO的时域位置和所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置均不重叠时,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上或所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用 户身份的寻呼消息。When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the device operates in the first user as the first user. The PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,所述接收单元还用于以所述第一用户身份从核心网设备接收所述第二用户设备标识,或者,所述第一偏移值,或者所述第二偏移值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the second user equipment identifier from the core network device as the first user identity, or the first bias Shift value, or the second shift value.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,发送单元,用于以所述第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述装置支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述装置的所述第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is configured to send first indication information to the core network device as the first user, and the first indication information is used to instruct the apparatus Support at least two user identities, or indicate that the first user identity of the device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,当所述确定单元确定所述第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与所述第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠时,所述发送单元还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述核心网设备发送所述第一指示信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, when the determining unit determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, The sending unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the core network device as the first user.
第五方面,提供了一种寻呼的装置,用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体的,该装置包括用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。所述装置包括接收单元和发送单元。In a fifth aspect, a paging device is provided, which is used to execute the foregoing second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. Specifically, the device includes a module for executing the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. The device includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
接收单元,用于获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO;The receiving unit is configured to obtain first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicates that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two user identities in one paging cycle PO;
发送单元,用于向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The sending unit is configured to send second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述发送单元具体用于:With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the sending unit is specifically configured to:
向所述接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述接入网设备对所述终端设备进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Send a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述发送单元具体用于:With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the sending unit is specifically configured to:
向所述接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Sending an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述至少两个PO中包括第一PO和第二PO,With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO.
或,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。Or, the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, wherein the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO , The first offset value is used to determine the second PO.
或,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。Or, the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, wherein the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO , The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO .
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fifth aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,所述发送单元还用于向所述终端设备发送所述第二用户设备标识,或所述第一偏移值,或所述第二偏移值。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the first offset value to the terminal device. Two offset value.
第六方面,提供了一种寻呼的装置,用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体的,该装置包括用于执行上述第三方面或第二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。该装置包括接收单元、确定单元和发送单元。In a sixth aspect, a paging device is provided, which is used to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect. Specifically, the device includes a module for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect or the second aspect. The device includes a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
接收单元,用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述装置在终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内的至少两个寻呼时机PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the apparatus sends the terminal device to the terminal on at least two paging occasions PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device. The device sends a paging message.
确定单元,用于确定所述寻呼周期内的第一PO和第二PO,其中,所述至少两个PO包括所述第一PO和所述第二PO。The determining unit is configured to determine the first PO and the second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO.
发送单元,用于在所述第一PO和所述第二PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The sending unit is configured to send a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述接收单元具体用于:With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
接收寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第一接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Receiving a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述接收单元具体用于:With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
从核心网设备接收所述寻呼消息。Receiving the paging message from the core network device.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述接收单元具体用于:With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
从第二接入网设备接收所述寻呼消息,所述第二接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。Receiving the paging message from a second access network device, where the second access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述接收单元具体用于:With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
从所述核心网设备接收初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Receiving an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述发送单元还用于:With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to:
向第三接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述装置是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第三接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Send a paging message to a third access network device, where the apparatus is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message is used to indicate the third access The network device pages the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。或With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein, The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移值。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,或子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种寻呼装置,包括:存储器和处理器。其中,该存储器用于存储指令,该处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令,并且当该处理器执行该存储器存储的指令时,该执行使得该处理器执行第一方面至第三方面中任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a paging device, including: a memory and a processor. Wherein, the memory is used to store instructions, the processor is used to execute instructions stored in the memory, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the execution causes the processor to execute any one of the first aspect to the third aspect Aspect or any possible implementation of any aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第一方面至第三方面中任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In an eighth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes a computer program for executing any one of the first to third aspects or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects The instruction of the method in the way.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品中包含指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现上述第一方面至第三方面中任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product contains instructions that, when run on a computer, enable the computer to implement any one or any of the first to third aspects above Any possible implementation of the method described in.
第十方面,提供了一种芯片,包括处理器和通信接口,所述处理器用于从所述通信接口调用并运行指令,当所述处理器执行所述指令时,实现上述第一方面至第三方面中任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a chip is provided, which includes a processor and a communication interface. The processor is used to call and execute instructions from the communication interface. When the processor executes the instructions, it implements the first aspect to the first aspect. A method in any one of the three aspects or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects.
可选地,该芯片还可以包括存储器,该存储器中存储有指令,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的指令或源于其他的指令。当该指令被执行时,处理器用于实现上述第一方面至第三方面中任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。Optionally, the chip may further include a memory in which instructions are stored, and the processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory or instructions derived from other sources. When the instruction is executed, the processor is used to implement any one of the foregoing first to third aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the aspects.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括具有实现上述第一方面的各方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置,上述具有实现上述第二方面的各方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置,以及上述具有实现上述第三方面的各方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a device capable of implementing the methods and various possible designs of the foregoing first aspect, and the foregoing has the methods and various possible designs that implement the foregoing second aspect. The device with the function of, and the device with the above-mentioned method and various possible design functions of the above-mentioned third aspect.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1示出了本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图。Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图2示出了本申请实施例的另一种应用场景的示意图。Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图3A示出了终端设备的被动模式的一种示意图。FIG. 3A shows a schematic diagram of the passive mode of the terminal device.
图3B示出了终端设备的DSDS模式的一种示意图。FIG. 3B shows a schematic diagram of the DSDS mode of the terminal device.
图3C示出了终端设备的DSDA模式的一种示意图。Fig. 3C shows a schematic diagram of the DSDA mode of the terminal device.
图4示出了网络设备对终端设备发起寻呼的一个示意性流程图。Figure 4 shows a schematic flow chart of a network device initiating paging to a terminal device.
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的终端设备的寻呼周期的一个示例。Fig. 5 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图6示出了本申请实施例的一种寻呼的方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 6 shows a schematic flowchart of a paging method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的终端设备的寻呼周期的一个示例。Fig. 9 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图11为本申请实施例提供的无线通信的装置的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the application.
图12为本申请提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:例如:全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR),以及后续演进通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, broadband code division Multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system , LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), and subsequent evolutionary communication systems, etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备, 虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals are: mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids Wireless terminals in transportation safety (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart city (smart city), wireless terminals in smart home (smart home), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (session initiation protocol) , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in a 5G network, or terminal devices in a public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, Gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. Connect with the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things.
而如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。The various terminal devices described above, if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be regarded as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, for example, the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为,能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
本申请实施例中的接入网设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该接入网设备也可以称为接入设备或无线接入网设备,可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该接入设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及5G网络中的接入设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等,可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point,AP),可以是新型无线系统(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB本申请实施例并不限定。The access network device in the embodiments of the present application may be a device used to communicate with terminal devices. The access network device may also be called an access device or a wireless access network device, and may be an evolved base station in an LTE system ( evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wearable device As well as the access equipment in the 5G network or the network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, it can be the access point (AP) in the WLAN, or the gNB in the new radio system (NR) system. The embodiments of the present application are not limited.
另外,在本申请实施例中,接入网设备是RAN中的设备,或者说,是将终端设备接入到无线网络的RAN节点。例如,作为示例而非限定,作为接入网设备,可以列举:gNB、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)等。在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit, DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的RAN设备。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the access network device is a device in the RAN, or in other words, a RAN node that connects a terminal device to a wireless network. For example, as an example and not a limitation, as an access network device, it can be listed: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller) , RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB) ), baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), etc. In a network structure, the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU). -CP node), user plane CU node (CU-UP node) and RAN equipment of DU node.
接入网设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与接入网设备进行通信,该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The access network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the access network equipment through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell. The cell may be an access network equipment (for example, a base station). ) Corresponding cell. The cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell. The small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell ), femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
本申请实施例中,核心网设备可以与接入网设备连接,使得终端设备能够通过接入网设备与核心网设备进行通信。示例性的,在核心网设备中,可以包括以下网元或功能:In the embodiment of the present application, the core network device may be connected to the access network device, so that the terminal device can communicate with the core network device through the access network device. Exemplarily, the core network equipment may include the following network elements or functions:
接入管理功能(access management function,AMF):主要负责接入和移动性控制,包括注册管理(registration management,RM)和连接管理(connection management,CM)、接入鉴权和接入授权、可达性管理和移动性管理等。Access management function (AMF): Mainly responsible for access and mobility control, including registration management (RM) and connection management (CM), access authentication and access authorization, Reachability management and mobility management, etc.
用户面功能(user plane function,UPF):主要提供用户面支持,包括PDU会话和数据网络的连接点、数据包路由和转发、数据包检测和用户面策略执行、为用户面处理QoS、下行数据包缓存和下行数据通知的触发等。User plane function (UPF): mainly provides user plane support, including connection points between PDU sessions and data networks, data packet routing and forwarding, data packet inspection and user plane policy execution, processing QoS for the user plane, and downlink data Packet buffering and triggering of downstream data notifications, etc.
分组控制功能(packet control function,PCF):主要是策略控制功能,包括支持统一化策略框架来监视网络行为、为控制面提供策略规则去执行。Packet control function (PCF): Mainly a policy control function, including support for a unified policy framework to monitor network behavior and provide policy rules for the control plane to execute.
鉴权服务功能(authentication server function,AUSF):主要负责提供安全相关的功能,如:鉴权,认证等。Authentication server function (authentication server function, AUSF): Mainly responsible for providing security-related functions, such as authentication, authentication, etc.
统一数据管理(unified data Management,UDM):负责用户的鉴权认证相关的功能,具体有:鉴权凭据处理、用户身份处理、签约信息管理、接入授权等。Unified data management (UDM): Responsible for functions related to user authentication, including: authentication credential processing, user identity processing, contract information management, access authorization, etc.
图1示出了本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图。在图1中包括一个接入网设备、一个核心网设备以及一个终端设备。其中,该接入网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信系统陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)系统中,或者工作在NR系统中,或者工作在下一代通信系统或其他通信系统中。该核心网设备例如工作在E-UTRA系统中,或者工作在NR系统中,或者工作在下一代通信系统或其他通信系统中。图1中,以核心网设备工作在5G核心网(5GC)为例,核心网设备与接入网设备之间可以通过NG接口通信,接入网设备和终端设备之间可以通过Uu接口通信。在本申请实施例中,一个接入网设备可以服务于多个终端设备,图1只是以其中的一个终端设备为例,一个核心网设备也可以服务于多个接入网设备,图1只以其中的一个接入网设备为例。Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. Figure 1 includes an access network device, a core network device, and a terminal device. Among them, the access network equipment, for example, works in an evolved universal mobile communication system terrestrial radio access (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) system, or works in an NR system, or works in a next-generation communication system or other In the communication system. The core network equipment, for example, works in the E-UTRA system, or works in the NR system, or works in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems. In Figure 1, taking the core network equipment working in the 5G core network (5GC) as an example, the core network equipment and the access network equipment can communicate through the NG interface, and the access network equipment and the terminal equipment can communicate through the Uu interface. In the embodiments of this application, one access network device can serve multiple terminal devices. Figure 1 only takes one terminal device as an example. One core network device can also serve multiple access network devices. Take one of the access network equipment as an example.
图2示出了本申请实施例的另一种应用场景的示意图。在图2中包括接入网设备1、接入网设备2、核心网设备1、核心网设备2和一个终端设备。图2以接入网是无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)为例,核心网设备和接入网设备之间可以通过NG接口通信,接入网设备和接入网设备之间可以通过Xn接口通信。另外,接入网设备和终端设备之间可以通过Uu接口通信。其中,这两个接入网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信系统陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)系统中,或者工作在NR系统中,或者工作在下一代通信系统或其他通信系统中。这两个核心网设备例如工作在E-UTRA系统中,或者工作在NR系统中,或者工作在下一代通信系统或其他通信系统 中。Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 2, it includes an access network device 1, an access network device 2, a core network device 1, a core network device 2, and a terminal device. Figure 2 takes the radio access network (RAN) as an example. Core network equipment and access network equipment can communicate through NG interfaces, and access network equipment and access network equipment can communicate through NG interfaces. Xn interface communication. In addition, the Uu interface can be used to communicate between the access network device and the terminal device. Among them, these two access network devices, for example, work in the evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system, or work in the NR system, or work in the next-generation communication system Or in other communication systems. These two core network devices, for example, work in the E-UTRA system, or in the NR system, or in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
图1或图2中的接入网设备例如为基站。其中,接入网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备,例如在4G系统中可以对应eNB,在5G系统中对应5G中的接入网设备,例如gNB。同理,核心网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备,例如在4G系统中可以对应移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME),在5G系统中对应5G中的核心网设备,例如AMF。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信系统中,因此图1或图2中的接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信系统中的接入网设备,核心网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信系统中的核心网设备。图1或图2以接入网设备是基站为例,实际上参考前文的介绍,接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。The access network device in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is, for example, a base station. Among them, the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems. For example, in a 4G system, it can correspond to an eNB, and in a 5G system, it corresponds to an access network device in 5G, such as gNB. In the same way, core network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems. For example, in a 4G system, it can correspond to a mobility management entity (MME), and in a 5G system, it corresponds to a core network equipment in 5G, such as AMF. Of course, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems. Therefore, the access network equipment in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 can also correspond to the access network equipment and core network equipment in the future mobile communication system. The equipment can also correspond to the core network equipment in the future mobile communication system. Figure 1 or Figure 2 takes the access network device as a base station as an example. In fact, referring to the previous introduction, the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
本申请实施例中,终端设备支持至少一个用户身份,例如第一用户身份和/或第二用户身份。这里,“用户身份”(例如第一用户身份或第二用户身份等)为逻辑概念。例如,“用户身份”可以对应SIM卡或签约用户信息或虚拟SIM卡或用户标识(如国际移动用户标识(international mobile subscriber identity,IMSI)或临时移动用户标识(temporary mobile subscriber identity,TMSI)等)。从网络侧的角度来看,不同的“用户身份”在逻辑上对应网络侧服务的不同通信实体,比如4G和5G系统中的终端设备。例如一个支持两个用户身份的终端设备,对于网络侧来说,可以看做两个通信实体。再例如,“用户身份”对应SIM卡或签约用户信息时,网络侧会将支持不同SIM卡或不同签约用户信息的两个终端设备识别为两个不同的通信实体,也会将支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的同一终端设备识别为多个不同的通信实体,即使在实际上,支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的终端设备只是一个物理实体。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device supports at least one user identity, such as a first user identity and/or a second user identity. Here, "user identity" (for example, the first user identity or the second user identity, etc.) is a logical concept. For example, "user identity" can correspond to SIM card or subscriber information or virtual SIM card or user identity (such as international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), etc.) . From the perspective of the network side, different "user identities" logically correspond to different communication entities served by the network side, such as terminal devices in 4G and 5G systems. For example, a terminal device that supports two user identities can be regarded as two communication entities to the network side. For another example, when the "user identity" corresponds to the SIM card or subscriber information, the network side will recognize two terminal devices that support different SIM cards or different subscriber information as two different communication entities, and will also support multiple different communication entities. The same terminal device with SIM card or multiple subscriber information is identified as multiple different communication entities, even in reality, the terminal device supporting multiple different SIM cards or multiple subscriber information is just one physical entity.
示例性地,SIM卡可以理解为终端设备接入移动网络的钥匙,为了便于描述,本申请实施例中将SIM卡以及其演进都统称为SIM卡。例如SIM卡可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM)数字移动电话用户的身份识别卡,用于存储用户的身份识别码和密钥,并支持GSM系统对用户的鉴权。又例如,SIM卡也可以是全球用户识别卡(universal subscriber identity module,USIM),也可以称为升级SIM卡。本申请实施例中将主要以“用户身份”对应SIM卡为例进行说明。Exemplarily, the SIM card can be understood as the key for the terminal device to access the mobile network. For ease of description, the SIM card and its evolution are collectively referred to as the SIM card in the embodiments of the present application. For example, the SIM card may be an identification card of a global system for mobile communications (GSM) digital mobile phone user, which is used to store the user's identification code and key, and support the authentication of the user by the GSM system. For another example, the SIM card may also be a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), which may also be referred to as an upgraded SIM card. In the embodiments of the present application, description will be made mainly by taking the "user identity" corresponding to the SIM card as an example.
在本申请实施例中,将终端设备安装一个SIM卡,认为是终端设备支持一个用户身份。例如,安装两个SIM卡的终端设备,就支持两个用户身份。也就是说,SIM卡和用户身份是一一对应的关系。In the embodiment of the present application, a SIM card is installed in the terminal device, and it is considered that the terminal device supports a user identity. For example, a terminal device with two SIM cards installed supports two user identities. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the SIM card and the user identity.
作为示例,当前越来越多的智能手机支持同时插入两张SIM卡,例如,一张SIM卡用于私人业务,另一张SIM卡用于工作;或者,一张SIM卡用于数据业务,另一张SIM卡用于语音业务。其中,一个手机中的两个SIM卡可以属于同一移动运营商,也可以属于不同的移动运营商;可以属于同一制式(制式包括NR,LTE,宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分多址(time division multiple access,TDMA)2000,或GSM等),也可以属于不同制式。As an example, more and more smart phones currently support the insertion of two SIM cards at the same time. For example, one SIM card is used for private business and the other SIM card is used for work; or, one SIM card is used for data business. Another SIM card is used for voice services. Among them, the two SIM cards in a mobile phone can belong to the same mobile operator or different mobile operators; they can belong to the same standard (standards include NR, LTE, wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA ), time division multiple access (TDMA 2000, or GSM, etc.) can also belong to different standards.
根据终端设备的收发能力的不同,双SIM卡的终端设备可以具有以下三种模式中的一种:According to the different transceiver capabilities of the terminal device, the terminal device with dual SIM cards can have one of the following three modes:
1、被动(passive)模式,或者也称为DSSS模式:尽管能插入两张SIM卡,但是同一个时间只有一个能使用。1. Passive mode, or also known as DSSS mode: Although two SIM cards can be inserted, only one can be used at a time.
可参考图3A,为被动模式的示意图。图3A中,以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。在时间1,USIM1工作(或者说处于RRC连接态(connected)),也就是USIM1可以收发数据,此时USIM2不能被使用;或者,在时间2,USIM2工作(或者说处于RRC连接态),也就是USIM2可以收发数据,此时USIM1不能被使用。Refer to Figure 3A, which is a schematic diagram of the passive mode. In Figure 3A, two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example. At time 1, USIM1 is working (or in RRC connected state (connected)), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data, but USIM2 cannot be used at this time; or, at time 2, USIM2 is working (or in RRC connected state), also That is, USIM2 can send and receive data, but USIM1 cannot be used at this time.
2、DSDS模式:两个SIM卡共享一套收发机,对于空闲(idle)态,收发机需要监听两张卡的寻呼消息。例如收发机可以采用时分复用(time division multiple,TDM)方式来进行监听。2. DSDS mode: Two SIM cards share a set of transceivers. For the idle state, the transceiver needs to monitor the paging messages of the two cards. For example, the transceiver may use time division multiple (TDM) mode to monitor.
可参考图3B,为DSDS模式的示意图。图3B中,以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。在时间1,USIM1工作(或者说处于RRC连接态),也就是USIM1可以收发数据,此时USIM2可以处于空闲态或非激活态(inactive);或者,USIM2工作(或者说处于RRC连接态),也就是USIM2可以收发数据,此时USIM1可以处于空闲态或非激活态。在本文中,非激活态,也可以称为去激活态,或去活动态等。Refer to FIG. 3B, which is a schematic diagram of the DSDS mode. In Figure 3B, two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example. At time 1, USIM1 is working (or in RRC connected state), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data. At this time, USIM2 can be in an idle state or inactive state (inactive); or, USIM2 is working (or in RRC connected state), That is, the USIM2 can send and receive data, and at this time, the USIM1 can be in an idle state or an inactive state. In this article, the inactive state can also be called the deactivated state, or the deactivated state, etc.
3、DSDA模式:两个SIM卡使用各自的收发机。两个SIM卡可以同时处于RRC连接态,即终端设备可以同时接收和发送两个SIM卡的数据。3. DSDA mode: Two SIM cards use their own transceivers. The two SIM cards can be in the RRC connection state at the same time, that is, the terminal device can receive and send data from the two SIM cards at the same time.
可参考图3C,为DSDA模式的示意图。图3C中,以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。当USIM1工作时(或者说进入RRC连接态时),也就是USIM1收发数据时,USIM2也可以工作,即,USIM2和USIM1可以同时处于RRC连接态。Refer to Figure 3C, which is a schematic diagram of the DSDA mode. In Figure 3C, two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example. When USIM1 is working (or when it enters the RRC connected state), that is, when USIM1 is sending and receiving data, USIM2 can also work, that is, USIM2 and USIM1 can be in the RRC connected state at the same time.
下面介绍一下终端设备的上述3种无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)状态。如上文中所述,该3种RRC状态分别为:RRC连接态(connected态)、RRC空闲态(idle态)和非激活态(inactive态)。其中,非激活态也可以称为去活动态或去激活态等。The following introduces the above three radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) states of the terminal device. As mentioned above, the three RRC states are: RRC connected state (connected state), RRC idle state (idle state) and inactive state (inactive state). Among them, the inactive state can also be referred to as an inactive state or a deactivated state.
RRC连接态(或,也可以简称为连接态。在本文中,“连接态”和“RRC连接态”,是同一概念,两种称呼可以互换):终端设备与网络建立了RRC连接,可以进行数据传输。RRC connected state (or, can also be referred to as connected state for short. In this article, "connected state" and "RRC connected state" are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the network, and it can Perform data transfer.
RRC空闲态(或,也可以简称为空闲态。在本文中,“空闲态”和“RRC空闲态”,是同一概念,两种称呼可以互换):终端设备没有与网络建立RRC连接,基站没有存储该终端设备的上下文。如果终端设备需要从空闲态进入RRC连接态,则需要发起RRC连接建立过程。RRC idle state (or, can also be referred to as idle state for short. In this article, "idle state" and "RRC idle state" are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, and the base station The context of the terminal device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the idle state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process.
去活动态:终端设备之前进入了RRC连接态,然后基站释放了RRC连接,但是基站保存了该终端设备的上下文。如果该终端设备需要从去活动态再次进入RRC连接态,则需要发起RRC连接恢复过程(或者称为RRC连接重建立过程)。RRC恢复过程相对于RRC建立过程来说,时延更短,信令开销更小。但是基站需要保存终端设备的上下文,会占用基站的存储开销。Inactive state: The terminal device entered the RRC connected state before, and then the base station releases the RRC connection, but the base station saves the context of the terminal device. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state again from the inactive state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection recovery process (or called the RRC connection re-establishment process). Compared with the RRC establishment process, the RRC recovery process has shorter time delay and lower signaling overhead. However, the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
当终端设备没有数据传输时,为了省电,终端设备进入空闲态或去活动态。在该状态下,终端设备需要以一定的周期在一定的位置醒过来,监听网络是否有寻呼该终端设备。终端设备醒来的位置为寻呼时机(paging occasion,PO)。可参考图4,为网络设备对终端设备发起寻呼的一个示意性流程图。When the terminal device has no data transmission, in order to save power, the terminal device enters an idle state or an inactive state. In this state, the terminal device needs to wake up at a certain position in a certain period to monitor whether the network is paging the terminal device. The location where the terminal device wakes up is the paging occasion (PO). Refer to Figure 4, which is a schematic flowchart of a network device initiating paging to a terminal device.
S11、终端设备的下行数据到达核心网设备。S11. The downlink data of the terminal equipment arrives at the core network equipment.
S12、核心网设备向基站发送寻呼(paging)消息,基站接收来自核心网设备的paging消息。S12. The core network device sends a paging message to the base station, and the base station receives the paging message from the core network device.
对于空闲态的终端设备,当有下行数据到达核心网设备(即网络要发送数据给终端设备)时,核心网发送paging消息给该终端设备注册区域下的多个接入网设备,以触发多个基站在空口发送paging消息,图4只以其中一个接入网设备为例。For a terminal device in an idle state, when downlink data arrives at the core network device (that is, the network wants to send data to the terminal device), the core network sends a paging message to multiple access network devices under the terminal device registration area to trigger multiple access network devices. Each base station sends a paging message on the air interface. Figure 4 only takes one of the access network devices as an example.
其中,该paging消息可以包括用户设备标识(UE ID)。作为示例,该UE ID可以为核心网设备为该终端设备分配的的S临时移动用户识别码(S-temporary mobile subscriber identity,S-TMSI)。可选的,paging消息中还可以包括核心网分配给该终端设备的寻呼周期(可以记为T1)。一个示例,寻呼周期可以为寻呼不连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)周期,但是本申请实施例并不限于此。Wherein, the paging message may include a user equipment identification (UE ID). As an example, the UE ID may be an S-temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device to the terminal device. Optionally, the paging message may also include a paging cycle (which may be recorded as T1) allocated by the core network to the terminal device. As an example, the paging cycle may be a discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
S13、接入网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼时机。S13. The access network device determines the paging opportunity of the terminal device.
对于inactive态的终端设备,没有步骤S11和S12,当有下行数据到达接入网设备时,接入网设备可以确定发起对该终端设备的寻呼,并确定寻呼时机。For inactive terminal devices, there are no steps S11 and S12. When downlink data arrives at the access network device, the access network device can determine to initiate a paging to the terminal device and determine the paging timing.
在一些实现方式中,基站广播的小区的系统消息中可以广播一个小区级的寻呼周期(可以记为T2)。另外,对于inactive态的终端设备,接入网设备会给该终端设备分配一个寻呼周期(可以记为T3)。In some implementations, a cell-level paging cycle (which can be denoted as T2) can be broadcast in the system message of the cell broadcast by the base station. In addition, for a terminal device in the inactive state, the access network device will allocate a paging cycle (which can be recorded as T3) to the terminal device.
作为示例,接入网设备可以基于UE ID、寻呼周期以及小区的寻呼配置参数确定出终端设备的寻呼时机PO。其中,对于idle态的终端设备,用于确定PO的寻呼周期是T1和T2中的具有较小值的周期(可以记为T),对于inactive态的终端设备,用于确定PO寻呼周期是T1、T2和T3中的具有最小值的周期(可以记为T)。As an example, the access network device may determine the paging occasion PO of the terminal device based on the UE ID, paging cycle, and paging configuration parameters of the cell. Among them, for the terminal device in the idle state, the paging cycle used to determine the PO is the period with the smaller value of T1 and T2 (can be marked as T), and for the terminal device in the inactive state, it is used to determine the PO paging cycle It is the period with the smallest value among T1, T2, and T3 (can be denoted as T).
一个具体例子,小区的系统信息中广播的小区寻呼配置参数可以如下所示:For a specific example, the cell paging configuration parameters broadcast in the system information of the cell may be as follows:
Figure PCTCN2019109663-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019109663-appb-000001
其中,defaultPagingCycle即T2,基于nAndPagingFrameOffset可以得出寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)偏差(可以记为PF_offset),以及N,其中N用于标识一个寻呼周期内PF的个数,Ns指示一个寻呼帧里的PO的个数。Among them, defaultPagingCycle is T2. Based on nAndPagingFrameOffset, the paging frame (PF) offset (which can be recorded as PF_offset) can be obtained, and N, where N is used to identify the number of PFs in a paging cycle, and Ns indicates a paging frame. The number of POs in the call frame.
下面以NR系统为例,描述确定终端设备的寻呼时机PO的过程。The following takes the NR system as an example to describe the process of determining the paging occasion PO of the terminal device.
首先,可以确定终端设备的PO所在的寻呼帧PF。作为示例,可以通过下面公式(1)确定PO所在的PF。First, the paging frame PF in which the PO of the terminal device is located can be determined. As an example, the PF where the PO is located can be determined by the following formula (1).
(SFN+PF_offset)mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N)    (1)(SFN+PF_offset) mod T = (T div N)*(UE_ID mod N) (1)
其中,SFN表示系统帧号(system frame number),用于表示PF所在帧的帧号,PF_offset 表示PF的偏移量,T表示终端设备的寻呼周期,单位为帧,N表示一个寻呼周期内PF的个数,T div N表示每(T div N)个连续帧有一个PF,UE_ID为S-TMSI mode 1024。Among them, SFN represents the system frame number (system frame number), which is used to represent the frame number of the frame where the PF is located, PF_offset represents the offset of the PF, T represents the paging cycle of the terminal device, the unit is a frame, and N represents a paging cycle The number of inner PFs, T div N means that there is one PF every (T div N) consecutive frames, and the UE_ID is S-TMSI mode 1024.
其中,PF_offset、T、N的值均可以来自当前小区的广播,或者与当前小区广播的参数有关。Among them, the values of PF_offset, T, and N can all come from the broadcast of the current cell or are related to the parameters broadcast by the current cell.
在确定PF之后,可以确定终端设备的PO在PF中的时域位置。本申请实施例中,PO的时域位置还可以称为PO的位置。示例性的,确定PO在PF中的位置的过程可以分为如下步骤a和步骤b。After determining the PF, the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device in the PF can be determined. In the embodiments of the present application, the time domain position of the PO may also be referred to as the position of the PO. Exemplarily, the process of determining the position of the PO in the PF can be divided into the following steps a and b.
步骤a,通过以下公式(2)获取PO的编号i_s:Step a: Obtain the PO number i_s through the following formula (2):
i_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns     (2)i_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns (2)
步骤b,根据PO的编号,获取PO的时域位置。在获取PO的编号后,可以根据当前小区的寻呼的搜索空间的配置,可以获取到终端设备的PO的时域位置。Step b: Obtain the time domain position of the PO according to the number of the PO. After obtaining the number of the PO, the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device can be obtained according to the configuration of the search space of the paging of the current cell.
在LTE系统,可以根据如下公式(3)确定终端设备的寻呼时机PO所在的寻呼帧PF:In the LTE system, the paging frame PF where the paging occasion PO of the terminal device is located can be determined according to the following formula (3):
SFN mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N)    (3)SFN mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N) (3)
在确定PF之后,确定终端设备的PO在PF中的位置的过程与NR系统类似,这里不再赘述。After determining the PF, the process of determining the position of the PO of the terminal device in the PF is similar to the NR system, and will not be repeated here.
类似的,终端设备也可以基于UE ID、寻呼周期以及适用于当前小区下所有终端设备的小区寻呼配置参数,确定PO的时域位置。Similarly, the terminal device can also determine the time domain position of the PO based on the UE ID, paging cycle, and cell paging configuration parameters applicable to all terminal devices in the current cell.
S14、接入网设备通过空口发送paging消息,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的paging消息。S14. The access network device sends a paging message through the air interface, and the terminal device receives the paging message from the access network device.
接入网设备在空口发送paging消息。其中,如果接入网设备配置了无线接入网通知区域(radio access network-based notification area,RNA),接入网设备会在RNA指示的小区,在该终端设备的寻呼时机发送paging。如果RNA指示的小区中有属于其他接入网设备的小区,则该接入网设备可以向其他接入网设备发送paging消息,其他接入网设备可以在该终端设备的寻呼时机,通过空口发送paging消息。The access network device sends a paging message on the air interface. Among them, if the access network device is configured with a radio access network-based notification area (RNA), the access network device will send paging at the paging occasion of the terminal device in the cell indicated by the RNA. If there is a cell belonging to another access network device in the cell indicated by RNA, the access network device can send a paging message to other access network devices, and the other access network devices can use the air interface at the paging occasion of the terminal device. Send a paging message.
其中,paging消息可以携带用户设备寻呼身份(UE paging identity),以便接收paging消息的终端设备能够识别该paging消息是否是发送给自己的。Wherein, the paging message may carry the user equipment paging identity (UE paging identity), so that the terminal device receiving the paging message can identify whether the paging message is sent to itself.
终端设备在确定的PO上可以监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH),以接收paging消息。在收到paging消息,并确定该终端设备被寻呼后,该终端设备会在当前驻留的小区上发起新的RRC连接建立过程,或发起RRC连接恢复过程,以进入RRC连接态。The terminal device can monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) on the determined PO to receive the paging message. After receiving the paging message and determining that the terminal device is paged, the terminal device will initiate a new RRC connection establishment process on the cell where it currently resides, or initiate an RRC connection recovery process to enter the RRC connection state.
由上述描述可知,用于确定终端设备的PO的时域位置的参数包括UE ID、寻呼周期以及当前小区的小区寻呼配置参数。当一个终端设备中插入两张SIM卡时,这两张SIM卡可能驻留在不同的小区,终端设备可以以这两个SIM卡对应的两个用户身份分别在不同的网络进行注册。比如,终端设备以第一SIM卡对应的第一用户身份在第一网络进行注册,终端设备以第二SIM卡对应的第二用户身份在第二网络进行注册。完成注册后,第一网络会向第一用户身份的终端设备分配第一用户身份的用户设备标识,第二网络会向第二用户身份的终端设备分配第二用户身份的用户设备标识。终端设备确定第一用户身份在该第一用户身份的寻呼周期内的PO的时域位置,以及确定第二用户设备在该第二用户身份 的寻呼周期内的PO的时域位置。It can be seen from the above description that the parameters used to determine the time domain position of the PO of the terminal device include the UE ID, the paging cycle, and the cell paging configuration parameters of the current cell. When two SIM cards are inserted into a terminal device, the two SIM cards may reside in different cells, and the terminal device can register in different networks with the two user identities corresponding to the two SIM cards. For example, the terminal device registers on the first network with the identity of the first user corresponding to the first SIM card, and the terminal device registers on the second network with the identity of the second user corresponding to the second SIM card. After the registration is completed, the first network will allocate the user equipment identification of the first user identity to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second network will allocate the user equipment identification of the second user identity to the terminal device of the second user identity. The terminal device determines the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity in the paging cycle of the first user identity, and determines the time domain position of the PO of the second user equipment in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
对于支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的终端设备而言,可能会出现第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与其第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠(包括全部重叠和部分重叠)的情况。这时,对于DSDS模式的终端设备,由于终端设备在该PO位置上只能监听一个用户身份的寻呼消息,如果此时两个用户身份的PO位置均有寻呼消息发送,那么将导致终端设备接收不到另一个用户身份的寻呼消息,即第一用户身份与第二用户身份会出现寻呼冲突,导致其中一个用户身份出现寻呼丢失,进而造成漏话等问题。For terminal devices that support the first user identity and the second user identity, the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity may overlap with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity (including full overlap and partial overlap) Case. At this time, for the terminal device in DSDS mode, since the terminal device can only listen to the paging message of one user identity at the PO location, if both the PO locations of the user identity have paging messages sent at this time, it will cause the terminal The device cannot receive the paging message of another user identity, that is, a paging conflict will occur between the first user identity and the second user identity, resulting in paging loss of one of the user identities, which will cause problems such as missed calls.
或者,也可能会出现虽然第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的PO的时域位置没有重叠,但是二者的间隔很小的情况。这种情况下,由于这两个PO的间隔很小,终端设备在在其中一个用户身份的PO上接收完该用户身份的寻呼消息后,来不及进行射频调整,可能导致接收不到另一个用户身份的PO上的寻呼消息,这时第一用户身份与第二用户身份会同样会出现寻呼冲突,导致其中一个用户身份出现寻呼丢失,进而造成漏话问题。Or, it may happen that although the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity does not overlap with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the gap between the two is small. In this case, since the interval between the two POs is very small, after receiving the paging message of the user identity on the PO of one user identity, the terminal device is too late to adjust the radio frequency, which may result in the failure to receive the other user. The paging message on the PO of the identity, at this time, the first user identity and the second user identity will also have a paging conflict, resulting in page loss of one of the user identities, thereby causing a missed call problem.
鉴于此,提供本申请实施例的技术方案。在本申请实施例中,终端设备支持第一用户身份,并且在第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一PO和第二PO,即在现有技术中,一个用户身份在一个寻呼周期内只有一个针对该用户身份的PO,但是在本申请实施例中,第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包含两个针对第一用户身份的PO。其中,第一用户身份可以理解为,是终端设备安装了SIM卡1后具有的用户身份。接入网设备可以在该第一PO和第二PO上都发送该终端设备的第一用户身份的寻呼消息。终端设备可以以第一用户身份,选择在第一PO或第二PO上监听该第一用户身份的寻呼消息。因此,本申请实施例通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,且接入网设备在该第一PO和第二PO上均发送寻呼消息,使得终端设备以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择在第一PO上监听该寻呼消息,或者在第二PO上监听该寻呼消息,从而有助于避免寻呼丢失,进一步有助于避免寻呼丢失导致的漏话问题。In view of this, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are provided. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device supports the first user identity, and includes the first PO and the second PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity, that is, in the prior art, a user identity is in a paging cycle. There is only one PO for the user identity in a cycle, but in this embodiment of the present application, the first user identity includes two POs for the first user identity in one paging cycle. Among them, the first user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 1 is installed. The access network device may send a paging message of the first user identity of the terminal device on both the first PO and the second PO. As the first user, the terminal device can choose to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or the second PO. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the access network device sends a paging message on both the first PO and the second PO. , So that when the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can choose to monitor the paging message on the first PO or monitor the paging message on the second PO, thereby helping to avoid page loss, and further Helps to avoid missed call problems caused by paging loss.
一些可选的实施例中,终端设备还支持第二用户身份,并且在第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO。其中,第二用户身份可以理解为,是终端设备安装了SIM卡2后具有的用户身份。当第一用户身份与第二用户身份出现寻呼冲突时,终端设备以第二用户身份在第三PO上监听第二用户身份的寻呼消息,终端设备以第一用户身份在没有与第三PO冲突的PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息。In some optional embodiments, the terminal device also supports the second user identity, and includes the third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity. Among them, the second user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 2 is installed. When a paging conflict occurs between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user identity, and the terminal device does not communicate with the third user identity as the first user. The PO conflicting with the PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity.
一些实现方式中,对于第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内,即使有两个PO,终端设备也可以只需要监听其中一个PO。这样,尽管终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括两个PO,终端设备也总是只需要在该寻呼周期的一个PO醒来监听寻呼消息,即终端设备的每个用户身份在其对应的寻呼周期内各自只监听一次寻呼消息,这样有助于终端设备节能。In some implementation manners, even if there are two POs in one paging cycle for the first user identity, the terminal device may only need to monitor one of the POs. In this way, although the first user identity of the terminal device includes two POs in one paging cycle, the terminal device always only needs to wake up and listen to the paging message in one PO of the paging cycle, that is, each user of the terminal device The identities only monitor the paging message once in their corresponding paging cycle, which helps the terminal device to save energy.
比如,当第一用户身份的寻呼周期内的第一PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的寻呼周期内的第三PO的时域位置重叠或者间隔很小时(即第一PO和第三PO发生冲突),终端设备以第二用户身份在第三PO上监听该第二用户身份的寻呼消息,终端设备以第一用户身份在第二PO上监听该第一用户身份的寻呼消息,且终端设备不以第一用户身份在第一PO上监听该第一用户身份的寻呼消息。即当冲突发生时,既然第一用户身份在一个寻 呼周期内有两个PO,则可以优先监听第二用户身份的寻呼,在第一用户身份的不冲突的另一个PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼,这样能确保两个用户身份的寻呼消息都不会丢失。For example, when the time domain position of the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity or the interval is very small (that is, the first PO and the first PO Three PO conflicts), the terminal device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user, and the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user Message, and the terminal device does not monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO as the first user. That is, when a conflict occurs, since the first user identity has two POs in a paging cycle, the paging of the second user identity can be monitored first, and the first user identity can be monitored on another PO that does not conflict with the first user identity. User identity paging, which can ensure that the paging messages of the two user identities will not be lost.
又比如,当第一用户身份的寻呼周期内的第二PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的寻呼周期内的第三PO的时域位置重叠或者间隔很小时(即第一PO和第三PO发生冲突),终端设备以第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听第二用户身份的寻呼消息,终端设备以第一用户身份在第一PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息,且终端设备不以第一用户身份在第二PO上监听该第一用户身份的寻呼消息。For another example, when the time domain position of the second PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity or the interval is very small (that is, the first PO and The third PO conflicts), the terminal device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user, and the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user. Paging message, and the terminal device does not monitor the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user identity.
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的终端设备的寻呼周期的一个示例。作为示例,终端设备可以安装SIM卡1和SIM卡2,其中终端设备在安装SIM卡1之后具有第一用户身份,在安装SIM卡2之后具有第二用户身份。如图5所示,SIM卡1对应的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括两个PO(即第一PO和第二PO),其中第一PO可以标记为“1”,第二PO可以标记为“2”,SIM卡2对应的第二用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括一个PO(即第三PO),标记为“1”。其中,第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的第一PO的时域位置和第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的第三PO的时域位置重叠。这时,终端设备可以以第一用户身份在标记为“2”的PO上监听寻呼消息(由于重叠,不以第一用户身份在标记为“1”的PO上监听寻呼消息),以第二用户身份在标记为“1”的PO上监听寻呼消息。Fig. 5 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As an example, the terminal device may install the SIM card 1 and the SIM card 2, wherein the terminal device has the first user identity after the SIM card 1 is installed, and has the second user identity after the SIM card 2 is installed. As shown in Figure 5, the first user identity corresponding to SIM card 1 includes two POs (ie, the first PO and the second PO) in a paging cycle, where the first PO can be marked as "1" and the second PO It can be marked as "2", and the second user identity corresponding to SIM card 2 includes a PO (that is, the third PO) in a paging cycle, which is marked as "1". Wherein, the time domain position of the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity. At this time, the terminal device can monitor the paging message on the PO marked "2" as the first user (due to the overlap, the terminal device may not monitor the paging message on the PO marked "1" as the first user) to The second user identity monitors the paging message on the PO marked "1".
又比如,当第一用户身份与第二用户身份不会出现冲突时,终端设备以第一用户身份在寻呼周期中的任一个PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息,终端设备以第二用户身份在寻呼周期中的第三PO上监听第二用户身份的寻呼消息。比如,当第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的第一PO的时域位置和第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的第三PO的时域位置不重叠,且间隔较大,且第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的第二PO的时域位置和第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的第三PO的时域位置不重叠,且间隔较大时,终端设备以第一用户身份在第一PO上和第二PO中出现较早的PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息,或者终端设备以第一用户身份在根据UE ID计算出的那个PO上监听第一用户身份的寻呼消息,终端设备以第二用户身份在第三PO上监听第二用户身份的寻呼消息。For another example, when there is no conflict between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on any PO in the paging cycle as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the first user identity to monitor the paging message of the first user identity. Second, the user identity monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO in the paging cycle. For example, when the time domain position of the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity and the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity do not overlap, and the interval is large, and the first user The time domain position of the second PO in the paging cycle of the identity and the time domain position of the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity do not overlap, and when the interval is large, the terminal device is in the first user identity as the first user. One PO and the second PO appear on the earlier PO to monitor the paging message of the first user identity, or the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the PO calculated according to the UE ID as the first user Message, the terminal device listens to the paging message of the second user on the third PO as the second user.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得在第一用户身份与第二用户身份可能出现寻呼冲突的情况下,终端设备在以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that In the case of possible paging conflicts between the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user, when the terminal device monitors the paging message with the identity of the first user, it can select the time of the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user. Monitoring on the PO conflicting on the domain resources can avoid the loss of paging messages in the user identity of the terminal device.
需要说明的是,第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内除了包括第一PO和第二PO之外,还可以包括其他PO,比如第四PO,本申请实施例对此不做限定。本申请实施例将主要基于寻呼周期内包括两个PO进行描述,当寻呼周期内包括两个以上的PO时,其具体实现可以参照寻呼周期内包括两个PO的相关描述,可能需要做一些简单的适配,但是也在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。It should be noted that in a paging cycle of the first user identity, in addition to the first PO and the second PO, other POs, such as the fourth PO, may also be included, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the inclusion of two POs in the paging cycle. When more than two POs are included in the paging cycle, the specific implementation can refer to the related description of including two POs in the paging cycle. Some simple adaptations are made, but they are also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
可以理解的是,可以基于通信制式,确定终端设备的哪个SIM卡的寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。比如,考虑到向后兼容性,NR通信系统中更容易引入该机制,因此可以优先选择驻留在NR小区的SIM卡对应的用户身份的寻呼周期内包至少两个PO。或者在一些可选的实施例中,可以由终端设备来实现,本申请实施例对此不做限定。It is understandable that, based on the communication standard, it is possible to determine which SIM card of the terminal device includes at least two POs in the paging cycle. For example, considering backward compatibility, it is easier to introduce this mechanism into the NR communication system. Therefore, the user identity corresponding to the SIM card residing in the NR cell can be preferentially selected to include at least two POs in the paging cycle. Or in some optional embodiments, it may be implemented by a terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在一些可能的实现方式中,第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的两个PO中的一个PO,比如第一PO可以是根据该第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。一个示例,第一用户设备标识可以是终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络中时,网络为该终端设备分配的用户设备标识。示例性的,可以根据上文中所述的确定PO的过程,以及第一用户设备标识来确定第一PO。In some possible implementation manners, one of the two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity, for example, the first PO may be determined according to the first user equipment identity of the first user identity. As an example, the first user equipment identification may be a user equipment identification assigned by the network to the terminal device when the terminal device is registered in the network as the first user. Exemplarily, the first PO may be determined according to the process of determining the PO described above and the first user equipment identifier.
一些可选的实施例中,第一用户设备标识为该第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。In some optional embodiments, the first user equipment identifier is the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
一种可能的实现方式,该两个PO中的另一个PO,比如第二PO可以是基于该第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,该第二用户设备标识不同于上述第一用户设备标识。一个示例,第二用户设备标识可以是核心网设备额外分配给终端设备的第一用户身份的不同于第一用户设备标识的一个用户设备标识(即第一用户身份被核心网设备分配了两个用户设备标识)。示例性的,可以根据上文中所述的确定PO的过程,以及第二用户设备标识来确定第二PO。In a possible implementation manner, the other of the two POs, for example, the second PO may be determined based on the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the above-mentioned first user equipment identification. A user equipment identification. As an example, the second user equipment identity may be a user equipment identity that is different from the first user equipment identity of the first user identity that is additionally allocated by the core network device to the terminal device (that is, the first user identity is allocated by the core network device to two User equipment identification). Exemplarily, the second PO may be determined according to the procedure for determining the PO described above and the second user equipment identifier.
一些可选的实施例中,第二用户设备标识为该第一用户身份的另一个临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。In some optional embodiments, the second user equipment is identified as another temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
另一种可能的实现方式,该两个PO中的另一个PO,比如第二PO可以是根据第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值确定的。其中,第一偏移值可以用于指示第二PO对应的第三用户设备标识相对所述第一用户设备标识的偏移量。也就是说,可以先对第一用户设备标识进行第一偏移值的偏移,获取第三用户设备标识,然后,根据第三用户设备标识,确定第二PO。一些具体的示例,第一偏移值可以为“1”,或者“2”,或者其他。示例性的,可以根据上文中所述的确定PO的过程,以及第三用户设备标识来确定第二PO。In another possible implementation manner, the other PO of the two POs, such as the second PO, may be determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. The first offset value may be used to indicate the offset of the third user equipment identifier corresponding to the second PO relative to the first user equipment identifier. In other words, the first user equipment identification may be offset by the first offset value to obtain the third user equipment identification, and then the second PO may be determined according to the third user equipment identification. In some specific examples, the first offset value may be "1", or "2", or others. Exemplarily, the second PO may be determined according to the procedure for determining the PO described above and the third user equipment identifier.
需要说明的是,这里第三用户设备标识并不是该第一用户身份的用户设备标识,而是对第一用户身份的用户设备标识进行偏移所获得的用户设备标识。It should be noted that the third user equipment identity here is not the user equipment identity of the first user identity, but the user equipment identity obtained by offsetting the user equipment identity of the first user identity.
另一种可能的实现方式,该两个PO中的另一个PO,比如第二PO可以是根据第一PO的时域位置以及第二偏移值确定的,其中,第二偏移值用于指示第二PO的时域位置相对第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。In another possible implementation manner, the other of the two POs, such as the second PO, may be determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and the second offset value, where the second offset value is used for Indicates the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
作为示例,第二偏移值可以为无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。例如,当第二偏移值为1个无线帧时,第二PO在第一PO所在时域位置之后的下一个无线帧中,并且第二PO在下一个无线帧中的位置与第一PO在其所在无线帧中的位置相同。又例如,当第二偏移值为1个寻呼帧时,第二PO在第一PO所在时域位置之后的下一个寻呼帧中,并且第二PO在下一个寻呼帧中的位置与第一PO在其所在寻呼帧中的位置相同。又例如,当第二偏移值为1个子帧时,第二PO在第一PO所在时域位置之后的下一个子帧中,并且第二PO在下一个子帧中的位置与第一PO在其所在子帧中的位置相同。As an example, the second offset value may be at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value. For example, when the second offset value is 1 radio frame, the second PO is in the next radio frame after the time domain position of the first PO, and the position of the second PO in the next radio frame is the same as that of the first PO. The position in the radio frame is the same. For another example, when the second offset value is 1 paging frame, the second PO is in the next paging frame after the time domain position of the first PO, and the position of the second PO in the next paging frame is the same as that of the second PO in the next paging frame. The position of the first PO in the paging frame is the same. For another example, when the second offset value is 1 subframe, the second PO is in the next subframe after the time domain position of the first PO, and the position of the second PO in the next subframe is the same as that of the first PO. The positions in the subframes are the same.
又例如,当第二偏移值为1个无线帧和1个子帧时,第二PO在第一PO所在时域位置之后的下一个无线帧中,且第二PO在该下个无线帧中的时域位置相对第一PO在其所在的无线帧中的时域位置的偏移1个子帧。For another example, when the second offset value is 1 radio frame and 1 subframe, the second PO is in the next radio frame after the time domain position where the first PO is located, and the second PO is in the next radio frame The time domain position of the first PO is offset by 1 subframe from the time domain position of the first PO in the radio frame in which it is located.
一些可能的实现方式中,可以预先定义第一偏移值或第二偏移值。示例性的,终端设备或接入网设备中可以预先存储第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,或者由协议定义第一偏移值, 或第二偏移值,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some possible implementations, the first offset value or the second offset value may be predefined. Exemplarily, the first offset value or the second offset value may be stored in the terminal device or the access network device in advance, or the first offset value or the second offset value may be defined by the protocol. This is not limited.
还需要注意的是,本申请实施例中,应当避免第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的两个PO的时域位置均与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO时域位置出现冲突。It should also be noted that in this embodiment of the application, it should be avoided that the time domain positions of the two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity conflict with the time domain positions of the PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity.
一个示例,在第一用户身份的寻呼周期是第二用户身份的寻呼周期的整数倍的情况下,比如第一用户身份的寻呼周期是64个无线帧,第二用户身份的寻呼周期是32个无线帧,这时即使第一用户身份的寻呼周期内包括两个PO,也可能会出现该两个PO的时域位置刚好与第二用户身份的连续两个寻呼周期中的PO的时域位置重叠的情况。For example, in the case where the paging cycle of the first user identity is an integer multiple of the paging cycle of the second user identity, for example, the paging cycle of the first user identity is 64 radio frames, and the paging of the second user identity The cycle is 32 radio frames. At this time, even if two POs are included in the paging cycle of the first user identity, it may happen that the time domain position of the two POs is exactly the same as that of the second user identity in two consecutive paging cycles. The time domain position of the PO overlaps.
此时,一种可能的方式,终端设备可以以一个用户身份(比如第一用户身份)向核心网设备发送辅助信息,该辅助信息用于指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数,和/或所述终端设备的第二用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数。核心网设备接收到该辅助信息之后,可以根据该辅助信息,确定上述第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值。因此,核心网设备能基于该辅助信息来确保基于第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值得出的第二PO不再与第二用户身份的PO发生冲突,从而避免第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。At this time, in a possible way, the terminal device can send auxiliary information to the core network device as a user identity (such as the first user identity), and the auxiliary information is used to indicate the identity of the first user of the terminal device for determining The parameter of the paging occasion, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device for determining the paging occasion. After receiving the auxiliary information, the core network device may determine the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value according to the auxiliary information. Therefore, the core network device can ensure based on the auxiliary information that the second PO derived based on the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value no longer conflicts with the PO of the second user identity, thereby Avoid the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
一个示例,当终端设备以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息时,辅助信息可以是下面信息的一种或多种的组合:As an example, when the terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device as the first user, the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
第一用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the first user identity;
第一用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the second user identity;
第二用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的S-TMSI。The S-TMSI of the second user identity.
另一个示例,当终端设备以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息时,辅助信息可以是下面信息的一种或多种的组合:In another example, when the terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device as the second user, the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
第一用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the first user identity;
第一用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the second user identity;
第二用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第一用户身份的S-TMSI。The S-TMSI of the first user's identity.
一些可选的实施例中,第二用户身份的寻呼周期中也可以包括两个PO,比如第三PO和第四PO。在这种的情况下,为了避免第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的两个PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的两个PO时域位置均出现重叠或间隔较小的情况,在第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的第一PO是根据第一用户身份的用户设备标识#1确定的情况下,第二PO可以是根据“用户设备标识#1+第一偏移值”确定的,在第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的第三PO是根据第二用户身份的用户设备标识#2确定的情况下,第四PO可以是根据“用户设备标识#2-第一偏移值”确定的。这样,能够尽量将第一用户身份的第一PO和第二PO与第二用户身份的第三PO和第四PO错开,避免第一用户身份与第二用户身份出现寻呼冲突。In some optional embodiments, the paging cycle of the second user identity may also include two POs, such as a third PO and a fourth PO. In this case, in order to avoid the time domain positions of the two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity and the time domain positions of the two POs in the paging cycle of the second user identity both overlapping or having a small interval In the case that the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity is determined according to the user equipment identity #1 of the first user identity, the second PO may be determined according to the "user equipment identity #1 + first bias In the case where the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity is determined according to the user equipment identity #2 of the second user identity, the fourth PO may be determined according to the “user equipment identity #2- The first offset value" is determined. In this way, the first PO and the second PO of the first user identity can be staggered with the third PO and the fourth PO of the second user identity as much as possible, so as to avoid paging conflicts between the first user identity and the second user identity.
示例性的,可以根据上文中所述的确定PO的过程,来确定第一PO、第二PO、第三PO和第四PO。Exemplarily, the first PO, the second PO, the third PO, and the fourth PO may be determined according to the process of determining the PO described above.
应理解,本申请实施例中,终端设备的第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内可以包括一个,两个或两个以上的PO。当第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括两个或两个以上的PO时,接入网设备可以在该两个,或两个以上的PO上都发送寻呼消息,终端设备可以以第二用户身份,选择在其中一个PO上监听该寻呼消息。因此,本申请实施例能够有助于降低终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突的概率。It should be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the second user identity of the terminal device may include one, two, or more than two POs in one paging cycle. When the second user identity includes two or more POs in a paging cycle, the access network device can send paging messages on both of the two or more POs, and the terminal device can use the first 2. User identity, choose to monitor the paging message on one of the POs. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application can help reduce the probability of paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device.
还应理解,本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以安装两个以上的SIM卡,则相应的终端设备也就支持两个以上的用户身份,例如终端设备支持三个用户身份、四个用户身份或更多的用户身份,并可以注册在两个以上的网络中,其中每个用户身份可以注册在一个网络中。It should also be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can also install more than two SIM cards, and the corresponding terminal device also supports more than two user identities. For example, the terminal device supports three user identities and four user identities. Or more user identities, and can be registered in more than two networks, and each user identity can be registered in one network.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案。本申请实施例主要是以终端设备支持两个用户身份为例,比如第一用户身份和第二用户身份。本申请实施例将主要基于终端设备支持两个用户身份进行描述,当终端设备支持两个以上的用户身份时,其具体实现可以参照终端设备支持两个用户身份的相关描述,可能需要做一些简单的适配,但是也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。The following describes the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application in conjunction with the drawings. The embodiment of the present application mainly takes the terminal device supporting two user identities as an example, such as the first user identity and the second user identity. The embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the terminal device supporting two user identities. When the terminal device supports more than two user identities, the specific implementation can refer to the related description of the terminal device supporting two user identities, and some simple things may be required. However, it is also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
其中,当终端设备的用户身份为第一用户身份时,从网络侧的角度来看,终端设备可以理解为一个用户(从协议的角度来看,就是一个终端设备,例如,称为第一用户);当终端设备的用户身份为第二用户身份时,从网络侧的角度来看,终端设备可以理解为又一个用户(例如,称为第二用户)。终端设备可以以第一用户身份注册在第一网络,以及以第二用户身份注册在第二网络。本申请实施例中,终端设备支持一个用户身份,也可以描述为,终端设备具有一个用户身份。同理,终端设备支持两个用户身份,也可以描述为,终端设备具有两个用户身份。Among them, when the user identity of the terminal device is the first user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as a user (from the perspective of the protocol, it is a terminal device, for example, called the first user ); When the user identity of the terminal device is the second user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as another user (for example, referred to as the second user). The terminal device can be registered in the first network as the first user and registered in the second network as the second user. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device supports one user identity, which can also be described as the terminal device having one user identity. In the same way, the terminal device supports two user identities, which can also be described as the terminal device having two user identities.
另外,需要说明的是,在本申请的各个实施例中所述的,“第一用户身份的终端设备”,可以理解为,“终端设备的第一用户身份”,这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的,这两种描述方式可以互换。同理,“第二用户身份的终端设备”,可以理解为,“终端设备的第二用户身份”,这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的,这两种描述方式可以互换。In addition, it should be noted that in the various embodiments of this application, the "terminal device with the first user identity" can be understood as "the first user identity of the terminal device", as indicated by these two descriptions. The content is the same, these two descriptions can be interchanged. In the same way, "the terminal device of the second user identity" can be understood as "the second user identity of the terminal device". The content indicated by the two description methods is the same, and the two description methods can be interchanged.
本申请的技术方案可以应用于无线通信系统中,例如,图1中所示的通信系统,或图2中所示的通信系统。处于无线通信系统中的三个通信装置之间可具有无线通信连接关系,该三个通信装置中的一个通信装置可对应于图1或图2中所示的终端设备,也可以为配置于终端设备中的芯片;该三个通信装置中的另一个通信装置可对应于图1或图2中所示的接入网设备,也可以为配置于接入网设备中的芯片;该三个通信装置中的另一个通信装置可对应于图1或图2中所示的核心网设备,也可以为配置于核心网设备中的芯片。The technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, for example, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or the communication system shown in FIG. 2. The three communication devices in the wireless communication system may have a wireless communication connection relationship. One of the three communication devices may correspond to the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be configured in the terminal. The chip in the device; the other communication device of the three communication devices may correspond to the access network device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be a chip configured in the access network device; the three communication devices The other communication device in the device may correspond to the core network device shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, or may be a chip configured in the core network device.
应理解,在本文示出的实施例中,第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的用户身份,不同的PO,不同的接入网设备等。It should be understood that, in the embodiments shown herein, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different user identities, different POs, and different access network devices.
还应理解,在本文示出的实施例中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。It should also be understood that in the embodiments shown herein, "pre-defined" can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). , This application does not limit its specific implementation.
还应理解,本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理 器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。It should also be understood that the “saving” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to being stored in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be separate settings, or may be integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。It should also be understood that the "protocol" in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
以下,不失一般性,首先以一个终端设备的寻呼过程为例详细说明本申请实施例。可以理解,处于无线通信系统中的任意一个终端设备或者配置于终端设备中的芯片均可以基于相同的方法进行寻呼,处于无线通信系统中的任意一个接入网设备或者配置于接入网设备中的芯片均可以基于相同的方法进行寻呼,处于无线通信系统中的任意一个核心网设备或者配置于核心网设备中的芯片均可以基于相同的方法进行寻呼。本申请对此不做限定。Hereinafter, without loss of generality, first, a paging process of a terminal device is taken as an example to describe the embodiments of the present application in detail. It can be understood that any terminal device in the wireless communication system or the chip configured in the terminal device can be paging based on the same method, and any access network device in the wireless communication system or configured in the access network device All the chips in the wireless communication system can perform paging based on the same method, and any core network device in the wireless communication system or the chip configured in the core network device can perform paging based on the same method. This application does not limit this.
请参见图6,为本申请实施例的一种寻呼的方法的示意性流程图。图6中所示的寻呼的方法包括步骤610至660。本申请实施例中,终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,比如第一用户身份和第二用户身份。Refer to FIG. 6, which is a schematic flowchart of a paging method according to an embodiment of this application. The paging method shown in FIG. 6 includes steps 610 to 660. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device supports at least two user identities, such as a first user identity and a second user identity.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例以终端设备以第一用户身份与核心网设备以及接入网设备进行交互,且第一用户身份的寻呼周期中包括至少两个PO为例,描述本申请实施例的寻呼的技术方案。其中,与第一用户身份的终端设备进行交互的核心网设备是该终端设备以第一用户身份注册的网络中的核心网设备。但是本申请实施例并不限于此,比如终端设备还可以以第二用户身份与核心网设备以及接入网设备进行交互,且第二用户身份的寻呼周期中包括至少两个PO。其中,与第二用户身份的终端设备进行交互的核心网设备是该终端设备以第二用户身份注册的网络中的核心网设备。具体的,终端设备以第二用户身份与网络设备交互的过程可以参照终端设备以第一用户身份与网络设备交互的过程的相关描述,可能需要做一些简单的适配,但是也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device interacts with the core network device and the access network device as the first user identity, and the paging cycle of the first user identity includes at least two POs as an example to describe the application The paging technical solution of the embodiment. The core network device that interacts with the terminal device of the first user identity is a core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered as the first user. However, the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this. For example, the terminal device may also interact with the core network device and the access network device as the second user identity, and the paging cycle of the second user identity includes at least two POs. The core network device that interacts with the terminal device of the second user identity is a core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered with the second user identity. Specifically, the process of the terminal device interacting with the network device as the second user can refer to the related description of the process of the terminal device interacting with the network device as the first user. Some simple adaptations may be required, but it is also implemented in this application. Within the scope of protection of the case.
可选的,步骤610,终端设备以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。对应的,核心网设备接收并保存该第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或用于指示终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO,或用于请求终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。Optionally, in step 610, the terminal device sends the first indication information to the core network device as the first user. Correspondingly, the core network device receives and saves the first instruction information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or is used to indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle, or is used to request the first user identity of the terminal device. The user identity includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
当第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份时,核心网设备在接收到第一指示信息后,获知该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份。此时,为了避免该终端设备多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突,核心网设备可以确定该终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。因为该核心网设备为终端设备以第一用户身份注册的网络中的核心网设备,因此从网络侧的角度来看,终端设备可以理解为一个用户,因此“核心网设备可以确定该终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO”,还可以描述为:“核心网设备可以确定该终端设备的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO”。这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的,可以相互替换。When the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, after receiving the first indication information, the core network device learns that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. At this time, in order to avoid paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device, the core network device may determine that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle. Because the core network device is the core network device in the network where the terminal device is registered as the first user, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as a user, so "the core network device can determine the terminal device's The first user identity includes at least two POs in a paging cycle", which can also be described as: "The core network device can determine that the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle". The content indicated by the two description methods is the same and can be replaced with each other.
一种可能的情况,终端设备可以在确定其第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与其第二用户身份的PO的时域位置全部或部分重叠,或者间隔很小(即时域位置冲突)时,以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。此时,第一指示信息还可以用于指示该终端设备的至少两个用户身份发生了寻呼冲突。在这种情况下,如果终端设备处于空闲态,则终端设备需要进入RRC连接态以发送该第一指示信息。In a possible situation, when the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of its first user identity and the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity completely or partially overlap, or the interval is small (real-time domain position conflict), Send the first indication information to the core network device as the first user. At this time, the first indication information may also be used to indicate that at least two user identities of the terminal device have a paging conflict. In this case, if the terminal device is in the idle state, the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state to send the first indication information.
可选的,当终端设备的至少两个用户身份不再发生寻呼冲突时,比如终端设备更换了服务小区(比如执行了小区重选)之后,终端设备可以通知核心网设备其至少两个用户身份不再发生寻呼冲突。此时,接入网设备可以恢复现有机制,即在一个寻呼周期内的一个PO上发送寻呼消息,以减少寻呼资源的消耗。Optionally, when at least two user identities of the terminal device no longer have a paging conflict, for example, after the terminal device changes a serving cell (for example, after performing a cell reselection), the terminal device may notify the core network device of its at least two users No more paging conflicts with identities. At this time, the access network device can restore the existing mechanism, that is, send a paging message on a PO in a paging cycle to reduce the consumption of paging resources.
因此,通过终端设备在确定第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的PO的时域位置冲突时,以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,使得接入网设备在一个寻呼周期的至少两个PO上均发送寻呼消息,能够降低系统寻呼资源的消耗。Therefore, when the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity conflicts with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device, so that the access network The device sends paging messages on at least two POs in a paging cycle, which can reduce the consumption of system paging resources.
另一种可能的情况,在终端设备支持至少两个用户身份时,不管这两个用户身份是否可能会发生寻呼冲突,终端设备均发送该第一指示信息,用于向核心网设备指示该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份。比如,终端设备在开机后,如果发现该终端设备中安装了两张SIM卡,则终端设备可以在SIM卡1对应的第一用户身份向核心网设备发送注册请求消息,该注册请求消息中可以携带第一指示信息,用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份。In another possible situation, when the terminal device supports at least two user identities, regardless of whether the two user identities may have a paging conflict, the terminal device sends the first indication information to indicate the core network device. The terminal device supports at least two user identities. For example, after the terminal device is turned on, if it is found that two SIM cards are installed in the terminal device, the terminal device can send a registration request message to the core network device under the first user identity corresponding to SIM card 1. The registration request message may Carry the first indication information, which is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities.
可选的,该终端设备在SIM卡2对应的第二用户身份向核心网设备发送注册请求消息,该注册请求消息中可以不携带用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份的指示信息。也就是说,此时终端设备的第二用户身份的寻呼周期内可以只包括一个PO。Optionally, the terminal device sends a registration request message to the core network device in the second user identity corresponding to the SIM card 2, and the registration request message may not carry indication information for indicating that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. In other words, at this time, the paging cycle of the second user identity of the terminal device may include only one PO.
因此,通过在终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,而不管该至少两个用户身份的寻呼是否冲突的情况下,以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,能够实现不需要经常通知网络设备是否需要在至少两个PO上均发送寻呼消息,从而降低系统的信令开销,并且比较容易实现。Therefore, by sending the first indication information as the first user identity to the core network device under the condition that the terminal device supports at least two user identities regardless of whether the paging of the at least two user identities conflicts, it is possible to realize that there is no need to frequently Notify the network device whether it is necessary to send paging messages on at least two POs, thereby reducing the signaling overhead of the system, and is easier to implement.
另一些可能的情况,第一指示信息可以用于请求核心网设备为终端设备的第一用户身份分配一个额外的用户设备标识。其中,该额外的用户设备标识用于确定第一用户身份的寻呼周期中的第二PO。In other possible situations, the first indication information may be used to request the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identifier for the first user identity of the terminal device. Wherein, the additional user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO in the paging cycle of the first user identity.
作为示例,终端设备在确定该终端设备的至少两个用户身份会发生寻呼冲突,或者该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份时,可以向核心网设备发送该第一指示信息,请求核心网设备为该终端设备的第一用户身份分配一个额外的用户设备标识。或者,也可以描述为,请求核心网设备为该终端设备分配一个额外的用户设备标识。核心网在接收到第一指示信息后,可以获知该终端设备在一个寻呼周期内需要至少两个PO,即可以推测出该终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或者该终端设备的至少两个用户身份可能会发生寻呼冲突。此时,为了避免该终端设备多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突,核心网设备可以为该终端设备分配一个额外的用户设备标识。作为示例,该额外的用户设备标识可以为上文中所示的第二用户设备标识。As an example, when determining that at least two user identities of the terminal device will have a paging conflict, or the terminal device supports at least two user identities, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the core network device to request the core network device Assign an additional user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device. Or, it can also be described as requesting the core network device to allocate an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device. After the core network receives the first indication information, it can learn that the terminal device needs at least two POs in a paging cycle, that is, it can be inferred that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or that the terminal device supports at least two user identities. Paging conflicts may occur for user identity. At this time, in order to avoid paging conflicts among multiple user identities of the terminal device, the core network device may assign an additional user equipment identifier to the terminal device. As an example, the additional user equipment identification may be the second user equipment identification shown above.
一些可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以通过非接入层(Non-access stratum,NAS)消息,将第一指示信息发送给核心网设备。也就是说,NAS消息中可以携带该第一指示信息。一个示例,NAS消息可以为NAS注册请求消息。示例性的,组成NAS消息的参数例如可以包括终端标识,终端能力,注册类型,协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话标识,数据网络名称DNN中的至少一个,或者其他参数。其中注册类型可以包括寻呼冲突的注册类型。也就是说,此时寻呼冲突的注册类型可以为第一指示信息的一个示例。In some possible implementation manners, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the core network device through a non-access stratum (Non-access stratum, NAS) message. In other words, the NAS message may carry the first indication information. As an example, the NAS message may be a NAS registration request message. Exemplarily, the parameters constituting the NAS message may include at least one of terminal identification, terminal capability, registration type, protocol data unit (PDU) session identification, data network name DNN, or other parameters. The registration type may include the registration type of paging conflict. That is to say, the registration type of the paging conflict at this time may be an example of the first indication information.
一些可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以通过RRC消息(比如RRC建立完成消息),将第一指示信息发送给接入网设备。然后,接入网设备可以将该第一指示信息通过接入网 设备与核心网设备之间的通信接口(比如N2接口),发送给核心网设备。作为示例,接入网设备可以通过N2接口向核心网发送初始UE消息,该初始UE消息中携带第一指示信息。In some possible implementation manners, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the access network device through an RRC message (such as an RRC establishment complete message). Then, the access network device may send the first indication information to the core network device through a communication interface (such as an N2 interface) between the access network device and the core network device. As an example, the access network device may send an initial UE message to the core network through the N2 interface, and the initial UE message carries the first indication information.
可选的,步骤615,,核心网设备还可以向终端设备发送第二用户设备标识,或者第一偏移值,或者第二偏移值。对应的,终端设备可以以第一用户身份从核心网接收该第二用户设备标识、第一偏移值,或者第二偏移值。Optionally, in step 615, the core network device may also send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the second user equipment identifier, the first offset value, or the second offset value from the core network as the first user identity.
一个示例,核心网设备可以向终端设备发送NAS注册响应消息,其中包括第二用户设备标识,或者第一偏移值,或者第二偏移值。As an example, the core network device may send a NAS registration response message to the terminal device, which includes the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value.
具体的,第二用户设备标识、第一偏移值,以及第二偏移值可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the second user equipment identifier, the first offset value, and the second offset value can be referred to the above description, and for brevity, the details are not repeated here.
620,核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。620. The core network device sends second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
示例性的,该至少两个PO包括第一PO和第二PO。具体的,第一PO和第二PO可以参见上文中的描述。Exemplarily, the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO. Specifically, the first PO and the second PO can refer to the above description.
一种可能的情况,第二指示信息可以包括终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。In a possible situation, the second indication information may include the first user equipment identification and the second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, where the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO.
示例性的,可以将第一用户设备标识带入上文中的公式(1)至公式(3),来确定第一PO,将第二用户设备标识带入上文中的公式(1)至公式(3),来确定第二PO,但是本申请实施例并不限于此。Exemplarily, the first user equipment identification can be brought into the above formula (1) to formula (3) to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identification can be brought into the above formula (1) to formula ( 3) to determine the second PO, but the embodiment of the application is not limited to this.
或者,另一种可能的情况,第二指示信息包括终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。作为示例,可以基于第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值确定所述第二PO。Or, in another possible situation, the second indication information includes the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device and the first offset value, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, the first offset value is used to determine the second PO. As an example, the second PO may be determined based on the first user equipment identification and the first offset value.
示例性的,可以根据第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,获取第三用户设备标识(比如为第一用户设备标识与第一偏移值之和或之差)。然后,将第三用户设备标识带入上文中的公式(1)至公式(3),来确定第二PO,但是本申请实施例并不限于此。Exemplarily, the third user equipment identifier (for example, the sum or difference between the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value) may be obtained according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. Then, the third user equipment identifier is brought into the above formula (1) to formula (3) to determine the second PO, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
或者,另一种可能的情况,第二指示信息包括终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。Or, in another possible situation, the second indication information includes the first user equipment identifier and the second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
一些可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息可以用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或者用于指示终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。这样,接入网设备根据该第二指示信息,可以确定在第一用户身份的寻呼周期内的至少两个PO上向终端设备发送寻呼消息。In some possible implementation manners, the second indication information may be used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or used to indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle. In this way, the access network device can determine to send a paging message to the terminal device on at least two POs in the paging cycle of the first user identity according to the second indication information.
这样,当接入网设备接收到该第二指示信息时,可以根据第二指示信息中的内容,确定在上述至少两个PO上终端设备发送寻呼消息。进一步的,接入网设备还可以根据第二指示信息中的内容,确定该至少两个PO中的第一PO和第二PO。In this way, when the access network device receives the second indication information, it can determine, according to the content in the second indication information, that the terminal device sends a paging message on the above at least two POs. Further, the access network device may also determine the first PO and the second PO of the at least two POs according to the content in the second indication information.
需要说明的是,第二指示信息可以是显式的指示信息,也可以是隐式的指示信息。比 如,如果核心网设备向接入网设备发送了第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,则意味着核心网设备向接入网设备发送了第二指示信息,接入网设备可以据此确定终端设备的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。It should be noted that the second indication information may be explicit indication information or implicit indication information. For example, if the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the access network device, it means that the core network device sends the second indication information to the access network device. According to this, the access network device can determine that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
需要说明的是,该接入网设备不一定是步骤610中的接入网设备。比如,随着终端设备的移动,终端设备已经从步骤610中的接入网设备的小区切换至步骤620中的接入网设备的小区中。It should be noted that the access network device is not necessarily the access network device in step 610. For example, as the terminal device moves, the terminal device has been handed over from the cell of the access network device in step 610 to the cell of the access network device in step 620.
作为示例,核心网设备可以通过寻呼消息,或初始上下文建立请求消息向接入网设备发送该第二指示信息。具体的,将在下文中进行详细描述。As an example, the core network device may send the second indication information to the access network device through a paging message or an initial context establishment request message. Specifically, it will be described in detail below.
630,接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO。630: The access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
一个示例,接入网设备可以根据第二指示信息,确定第一PO和第二PO的时域位置。As an example, the access network device may determine the time domain location of the first PO and the second PO according to the second indication information.
另一个示例,接入网设备可以根据核心网设备为该终端设备的第一用户身份分配的第一用户设备标识,确定第一用户的寻呼周期内的第一PO。进一步的,接入网设备可以根据预设预先定义(比如接入网设备预先存储),或者协议预先定义的第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,来确定第二PO。In another example, the access network device may determine the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user according to the first user equipment identifier assigned by the core network device to the first user identity of the terminal device. Further, the access network device may determine the second PO according to a preset pre-defined (for example, pre-stored by the access network device), or a first offset value or a second offset value pre-defined by a protocol.
具体的,确定第一PO和第二PO的过程可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the process of determining the first PO and the second PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
640,终端设备确定第一PO和第二PO。640. The terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO.
一个示例,终端设备可以根据核心网设备为该终端设备的第一用户身份分配的第一用户设备标识,确定第一用户的寻呼周期内的第一PO。As an example, the terminal device may determine the first PO in the paging cycle of the first user according to the first user equipment identifier assigned by the core network device to the first user identity of the terminal device.
进一步的,接入网设备可以根据预设预先定义(比如终端设备预先存储),或者协议预先定义第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,或者以第一用户身份从核心网设备接收的来的第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值,确定第二PO。Further, the access network device may be pre-defined according to presets (such as pre-stored by the terminal device), or the first offset value or the second offset value may be pre-defined by the protocol, or received from the core network device as the first user The second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value that comes, determines the second PO.
具体的,确定第一PO和第二PO的过程可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the process of determining the first PO and the second PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
650,终端设备在第一PO或第二PO上监听寻呼消息。650. The terminal device monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
作为示例,终端设备在第一用户身份的第一PO或第二PO中的哪个PO上监听寻呼消息,取决于哪个PO没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的第三PO在时域位置上冲突。具体的,可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。As an example, the terminal device monitors the paging message on which PO of the first PO or the second PO of the first user identity, depending on which PO is not in the time domain with the third PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity. Conflict in location. For details, please refer to the above description. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
660,接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息。660: The access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
670,接入网设备在第二PO上发送寻呼消息。670. The access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备在支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备在以第一用户身份监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, by setting the first PO and the second PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device, When the terminal device monitors the paging message as the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the second user identity to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple users of the terminal device The identity has the problem of paging message loss.
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。在图7所示的方法中,终端设备的第一用户身份在idle态时,在第一PO或第二PO上监听寻呼消息。FIG. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In the method shown in FIG. 7, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the idle state, the paging message is monitored on the first PO or the second PO.
应理解,图7示出了寻呼方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图7中的各个操作的变形。此外,图7中的各个步骤可以按 照与图7呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图7中的全部操作。It should be understood that FIG. 7 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 7. In addition, the various steps in Fig. 7 may be performed in a different order from that presented in Fig. 7, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 7 are to be performed.
701,终端设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。对应的,核心网设备接收该第一指示信息。701: A terminal device sends first indication information to a core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first indication information.
具体的,步骤701可以参见图6中步骤601的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, step 701 can be referred to the description of step 601 in FIG.
702,核心网设备保存上述第一指示信息。702. The core network device saves the foregoing first indication information.
可选的,核心网设备还可以根据第一指示信息,为终端设备额外分配一个新的用户设备标识,即该终端设备的第一用户身份具有两个用户设备标识。作为示例,用户设备标识可以为S-TMSI。Optionally, the core network device may additionally allocate a new user equipment identity to the terminal device according to the first indication information, that is, the first user identity of the terminal device has two user equipment identities. As an example, the user equipment identifier may be S-TMSI.
可选的,703,核心网设备向终端设备发送第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值。Optionally, 703, the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,终端设备和接入网设备可以根据第一偏移值和第二偏移值来确定第二PO。这时,核心网设备可以不向终端设备发送上述第二用户设备标识。可选的,第一偏移值或第二偏移值还可以预先定义,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some possible implementation manners, the terminal device and the access network device may determine the second PO according to the first offset value and the second offset value. At this time, the core network device may not send the above-mentioned second user equipment identifier to the terminal device. Optionally, the first offset value or the second offset value may also be defined in advance, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
具体的,步骤703,以及第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值可以参见上文中的相关描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, in step 703, and the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value, please refer to the relevant description above. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,终端设备在RRC连接态向核心网设备发送上述第一指示信息。终端设备在发送该第一指示信息之后,由RRC连接态进入空闲态。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first indication information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the first indication information, the terminal device enters the idle state from the RRC connected state.
704,核心网设备确定需要寻呼该终端设备。704: The core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged.
作为示例,核心网可以在该终端设备的下行数据到达时,确定需要寻呼该终端设备。As an example, the core network may determine that the terminal device needs to be paged when the downlink data of the terminal device arrives.
需要注意的是,针对idle态的终端设备,是由核心网设备触发的对终端设备的寻呼。在核心网设备确定需要寻呼终端设备之后,向接入网设备发送寻呼消息,即执行步骤705。It should be noted that for the terminal device in the idle state, the paging to the terminal device is triggered by the core network device. After the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged, it sends a paging message to the access network device, that is, step 705 is executed.
705,核心网设备向接入网设备发送寻呼消息,该寻呼消息携带第二指示信息。对应的,接入网设备接收该第二指示信息。由于该寻呼消息是通过核心网设备与接入网设备之间的NG接口发送的,因此,该寻呼消息也可以称为NG寻呼消息。705. The core network device sends a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message carries second indication information. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the second indication information. Since the paging message is sent through the NG interface between the core network device and the access network device, the paging message may also be called an NG paging message.
一些可能的实现方式中,当核心网设备为终端设备额外分配了第二用户设备标识时,该寻呼消息中可以携带该终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识。也就是说,第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识可以为第二指示信息的一个具体示例。In some possible implementations, when the core network device additionally allocates the second user equipment identifier to the terminal device, the paging message may carry the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device. Logo. That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
具体的,第二指示信息可以参见图6中的步骤620的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, for the second indication information, refer to the description of step 620 in FIG. 6, and for brevity, details are not described herein again.
706,接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO。706: The access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
707,终端设备确定第一PO和第二PO,并在第一PO或第二PO上监听寻呼消息。707. The terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO, and monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
708,接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息。708. The access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
709,接入网设备在第二PO上发送寻呼消息。709: The access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
在步骤708和步骤709中,由于该寻呼消息是在接入网设备与终端设备之间的空口上进行传输,因此该寻呼消息也可以称为空口寻呼消息。In step 708 and step 709, since the paging message is transmitted on the air interface between the access network device and the terminal device, the paging message may also be referred to as an air interface paging message.
具体的,步骤706至709可以参见图6中630至670的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 706 to 709 can refer to the descriptions of 630 to 670 in FIG.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备 以第一用户身份在idle态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the idle state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. The user identity has the problem of paging message loss.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。在图8所示的方法中,终端设备的第一用户身份在inactive态时,在第一PO或第二PO上监听寻呼消息。FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In the method shown in FIG. 8, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the inactive state, the paging message is monitored on the first PO or the second PO.
应理解,图8示出了寻呼方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图8中的各个操作的变形。此外,图8中的各个步骤可以按照与图8呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图8中的全部操作。It should be understood that FIG. 8 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 8. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 8 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 8, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 8 are to be performed.
801,终端设备向核心网设备发送第一指示信息。对应的,核心网设备接收该第一指示信息。801: A terminal device sends first indication information to a core network device. Correspondingly, the core network device receives the first indication information.
具体的,步骤801可以参见图6中步骤601的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, for step 801, refer to the description of step 601 in FIG. 6, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
802,核心网设备保存上述第一指示信息。802. The core network device saves the foregoing first indication information.
可选的,核心网设备还可以根据第一指示信息,为终端设备额外分配一个新的用户设备标识,即该终端设备的第一用户身份具有两个用户设备标识。作为示例,用户设备标识可以为S-TMSI。Optionally, the core network device may additionally allocate a new user equipment identity to the terminal device according to the first indication information, that is, the first user identity of the terminal device has two user equipment identities. As an example, the user equipment identifier may be S-TMSI.
可选的,803,核心网设备向终端设备发送第二用户设备标识,或第一偏移值,或第二偏移值。Optionally, 803, the core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
具体的,步骤803可以参见图7中703的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, step 803 can be referred to the description of 703 in FIG.
804,核心网设备向第一接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,该初始上下文建立请求消息中携带第二指示信息。804. The core network device sends an initial context establishment request message to the first access network device, where the initial context establishment request message carries second indication information.
应注意,步骤804中的第一接入网设备为该终端设备的第一用户身份当前的服务接入网设备。在一些可能的实施例中,步骤801至803与步骤804是相对独立的流程,也就是说,步骤804中的第一接入网设备与终端设备在执行步骤801至803时对应的第一接入网设备可以为同一个接入网设备,也可以为不同的接入网设备。It should be noted that the first access network device in step 804 is the current serving access network device of the first user identity of the terminal device. In some possible embodiments, steps 801 to 803 and step 804 are relatively independent processes, that is, the first access network device and the terminal device in step 804 perform steps 801 to 803 corresponding to the first access The network access devices can be the same access network device or different access network devices.
比如,终端设备的第一用户身份在经过上述步骤801至803之后,进入了空闲态。然后,该终端设备又要以第一用户设备发送数据进入连接态。此时,核心网设备给终端设备的第一用户身份当前的服务接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,该初始上下文建立请求消息中携带第二指示信息。For example, the first user identity of the terminal device enters the idle state after going through the above steps 801 to 803. Then, the terminal device will send data to the connected state with the first user device. At this time, the core network device sends an initial context establishment request message to the current serving access network device of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the initial context establishment request message carries the second indication information.
可见,对于inactive态的终端设备,核心网设备并不是通过寻呼消息将第二指示信息发送给接入网设备,而是,比如在终端设备进入连接态的过程中,通过初始上下文建立请求消息携带给接入网设备。It can be seen that, for the terminal device in the inactive state, the core network device does not send the second indication information to the access network device through a paging message, but, for example, through the initial context establishment request message when the terminal device enters the connected state. Carry to the access network equipment.
一些可能的实现方式中,当核心网设备为终端设备额外分配了第二用户设备标识时,该初始上下文建立请求消息中可以携带该终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识。也就是说,第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识可以为第二指示信息的一个具体示例。In some possible implementations, when the core network device additionally allocates a second user equipment identity to the terminal device, the initial context establishment request message may carry the first user equipment identity and the second user equipment identity of the first user identity of the terminal device. User equipment identification. That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
可选的,核心网还可以将第二指示信息携带在其他消息中发送给接入网设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, the core network may also carry the second indication information in other messages and send it to the access network device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
805,第一接入网设备向核心网设备发送初始上下文建立响应消息。805: The first access network device sends an initial context establishment response message to the core network device.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,终端设备在RRC连接态向核心网设备发送上述第 一指示信息。终端设备在发送该第一指示信息之后,由RRC连接态进入去激活(inactive)态。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first indication information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the first indication information, the terminal device enters an inactive (inactive) state from the RRC connected state.
806,第一接入网设备确定需要寻呼该终端设备。806: The first access network device determines that the terminal device needs to be paged.
作为示例,第一接入网设备可以在该终端设备的下行数据到达时,确定需要寻呼该终端设备。As an example, the first access network device may determine that the terminal device needs to be paged when the downlink data of the terminal device arrives.
需要注意的是,针对inactive态的终端设备,第一接入网设备需要寻呼该终端设备,使其进入连接态。也就是说,针对inactive态的终端设备,是由接入网设备自己触发的该空口寻呼消息。It should be noted that, for a terminal device in the inactive state, the first access network device needs to page the terminal device to enter the connected state. That is, for the terminal device in the inactive state, the air interface paging message is triggered by the access network device itself.
可选的,807,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送寻呼消息,携带第二指示信息。该寻呼消息用于指示第二接入网设备对终端设备的第一用户身份进行寻呼。Optionally, 807, the first access network device sends a paging message to the second access network device, which carries second indication information. The paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device.
此时,第一接入网设备是保存该终端设备的第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,还可以称为锚点接入网设备。对应的,第二接入网设备还可以称为该锚点接入网设备的邻接接入网设备。作为一例,如果锚点接入网设备给inactive态的第一用户身份的终端设备配置的RAN通知区域(RAN-based notification area,RNA)中,包含邻接接入网设备,则该锚点接入网设备向邻接接入网设备发送寻呼消息,该寻呼消息中包含第二指示信息,用于指示邻接接入网设备在第一用户身份的至少两个PO上向第一用户身份的终端设备发送寻呼消息。At this time, the first access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and may also be referred to as an anchor point access network device. Correspondingly, the second access network device may also be referred to as an adjacent access network device of the anchor point access network device. As an example, if the RAN notification area (RAN-based notification area, RNA) configured by the anchor access network device for the terminal device of the first user identity in the inactive state includes the adjacent access network device, the anchor access The network device sends a paging message to the neighboring access network device. The paging message contains second indication information for instructing the neighboring access network device to report to the terminal of the first user identity on at least two POs of the first user identity. The device sends a paging message.
示例性的,由于步骤807中的该寻呼消息是通过接入网之间的Xn接口传输的,因此该寻呼消息也可以称为Xn寻呼消息。Exemplarily, since the paging message in step 807 is transmitted through the Xn interface between the access networks, the paging message may also be referred to as an Xn paging message.
一些可能的实现方式中,当核心网设备为终端设备额外分配了第二用户设备标识时,该寻呼消息中可以携带该终端设备的第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识。也就是说,第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识可以为第二指示信息的一个具体示例。In some possible implementations, when the core network device additionally allocates the second user equipment identifier to the terminal device, the paging message may carry the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier of the first user identity of the terminal device. Logo. That is, the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier may be a specific example of the second indication information.
808,第一接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO。808: The first access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
809,第二接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO。809. The second access network device determines the first PO and the second PO.
810,终端设备确定第一PO和第二PO,并在第一PO或第二PO上监听寻呼消息。810. The terminal device determines the first PO and the second PO, and monitors the paging message on the first PO or the second PO.
811,第一接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息。811: The first access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
812,第一接入网设备在第二PO上发送寻呼消息。812: The first access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
可选的,813,第二接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息。Optionally, 813, the second access network device sends a paging message on the first PO.
可选的,814,第二接入网设备在第二PO上发送寻呼消息。Optionally, 814, the second access network device sends a paging message on the second PO.
具体的,第二接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO,第二接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息或在第二PO上发送寻呼消息,以及终端设备在第一PO或第二PO上监听第二接入网设备的寻呼消息,与第一接入网设备确定第一PO和第二PO,第一接入网设备在第一PO上发送寻呼消息或在第二PO上发送寻呼消息,以及终端设备在第一PO或第二PO上监听第一接入网设备的寻呼消息的过程类似,具体可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the second access network device determines the first PO and the second PO, the second access network device sends a paging message on the first PO or sends a paging message on the second PO, and the terminal device is in the first PO. The PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the second access network device, determines the first PO and the second PO with the first access network device, and the first access network device sends the paging message on the first PO or The process of sending a paging message on the second PO and that the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first access network device on the first PO or the second PO is similar. For details, please refer to the above description. For brevity, it is not here. Go into details again.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过对终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期中设置第一PO和第二PO,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在inactive态监听寻呼消息时,能够选择没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期 中的PO在时域资源上冲突的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the first PO and the second PO are set in a paging cycle for the first user identity of the terminal device, so that When the terminal device monitors the paging message in the inactive state with the identity of the first user, it can select the PO in the paging cycle that does not have the identity of the second user to monitor on the PO that conflicts with the time domain resource, thereby avoiding multiple terminal devices. A paging conflict occurred in the user identity.
一些可选的实施例中,当终端设备识别出第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼冲突时,终端设备可以以其中一个用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息,该辅助信息用于指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数,和/或所述终端设备的第二用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数。In some optional embodiments, when the terminal device recognizes that there is a paging conflict between the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device may use one of the user identities to send auxiliary information to the core network device, and the auxiliary information is used to indicate The parameter of the first user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging occasion, and/or the parameter of the second user identity of the terminal device used to determine the paging occasion.
核心网设备接收到该辅助信息之后,可以根据该辅助信息,重新分配一个用户设备标识给终端设备的第一用户身份或第二用户身份,核心网设备能基于该辅助信息来确保基于分配的新的用户设备标识得出的寻呼时机不再与另一个用户身份的寻呼时机发生冲突,从而避免第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼消息丢失的问题。After the core network device receives the auxiliary information, it can reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity or the second user identity of the terminal device based on the auxiliary information, and the core network device can ensure that the new allocation is based on the auxiliary information. The paging occasion derived from the user equipment identifier of the user equipment no longer conflicts with the paging occasion of another user identity, thereby avoiding the problem of paging message loss for the first user identity and the second user identity.
作为示例,用于确定寻呼时机的参数包括寻呼周期,寻呼资源配置和用户设备标识中的一个或多个。As an example, the parameters used to determine the paging occasion include one or more of paging cycle, paging resource configuration, and user equipment identification.
一个示例,当终端设备以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息时,辅助信息可以是下面信息的一种或多种的组合:As an example, when the terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device as the first user, the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
第一用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the first user identity;
第一用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the second user identity;
第二用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的S-TMSI。The S-TMSI of the second user identity.
另一个示例,当终端设备以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息时,辅助信息可以是下面信息的一种或多种的组合:In another example, when the terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device as the second user, the auxiliary information may be one or a combination of the following information:
第一用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the first user identity;
第一用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the first user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第二用户身份的寻呼周期;The paging cycle of the second user identity;
第二用户设备所在小区的寻呼资源配置,比如PF_offset,T,N中的一个或多个;The paging resource configuration of the cell where the second user equipment is located, such as one or more of PF_offset, T, and N;
第一用户身份的S-TMSI。The S-TMSI of the first user's identity.
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的终端设备的寻呼周期的一个示例。作为示例,终端设备可以安装SIM卡1和SIM卡2。如图9所示,SIM卡1对应的第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括的旧的PO与第二用户身份在一个寻呼周期内的PO在时域位置上重叠。这时,终端设备可以以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送辅助信息,核心网设备可以根据辅助信息,重新分配一个用户设备标识给终端设备的第一用户身份。根据该重新分配的用户设备标识,可以在第一用户身份的寻呼周期中确定一个新的PO,该新的PO的时域位置与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO的时域位置不重叠。这时,终端设备可以以第一用户身份在标记为新的PO上监听寻呼消息,以第二用户身份在标记为寻呼周期中的PO上监听寻呼消息,从而避免第一用户身份与第二用户身份出现寻呼冲突。Fig. 9 shows an example of a paging cycle of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As an example, the terminal device may install SIM card 1 and SIM card 2. As shown in FIG. 9, the old PO included in the first user identity corresponding to the SIM card 1 in a paging cycle and the PO of the second user identity in a paging cycle overlap in the time domain position. At this time, the terminal device may send auxiliary information to the core network device as the first user identity, and the core network device may reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity of the terminal device according to the auxiliary information. According to the reassigned user equipment identification, a new PO can be determined in the paging cycle of the first user identity, the time domain position of the new PO and the time domain position of the PO in the paging cycle of the second user identity Does not overlap. At this time, the terminal device can monitor the paging message on the PO marked as new as the first user, and monitor the paging message on the PO marked as the paging cycle as the second user, thereby avoiding the identity of the first user and A paging conflict occurs in the identity of the second user.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种寻呼方法的示意性流程图。在图10所示的方法中,终端设备的第一用户身份在idle态时,在新的PO上监听寻呼消息。FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another paging method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In the method shown in FIG. 10, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the idle state, the paging message is monitored on the new PO.
应理解,图10示出了寻呼方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图10中的各个操作的变形。此外,图10中的各个步骤可 以按照与图10现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图7中的全部操作。It should be understood that FIG. 10 shows the steps or operations of the paging method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 10. In addition, the various steps in Fig. 10 may be performed in a different order from that shown in Fig. 10, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 7 are to be performed.
1001,终端设备确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份出现寻呼冲突。1001. The terminal device determines that a paging conflict occurs between the first user identity and the second user identity.
1002,终端设备向核心网设备发送辅助信息。1002: The terminal device sends auxiliary information to the core network device.
具体的,终端设备向核心网设备发送辅助信息的方式可以与发送第一指示信息的方式类似。作为示例,携带辅助信息的消息与携带第一指示信息的消息类型可以相同。具体的,可以参考上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the manner in which the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the core network device may be similar to the manner in which the first indication information is sent. As an example, the message carrying the auxiliary information and the message carrying the first indication information may be of the same type. For details, please refer to the above description. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
1003,核心网设备根据辅助信息,为终端设备重新分配第四用户设备标识。1003. The core network device reassigns the fourth user equipment identifier to the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
1004,核心网设备向终端设备发送该第四用户设备标识。1004. The core network device sends the fourth user equipment identifier to the terminal device.
具体的,核心网设备向终端设备发送第四用户设备标识的方式可以与发送第二用户设备标识、第一偏移值或第二偏移值的方式类似。具体的,可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the manner in which the core network device sends the fourth user equipment identification to the terminal device may be similar to the manner in which the second user equipment identification, the first offset value, or the second offset value is sent. For details, please refer to the above description. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,终端设备在RRC连接态向核心网设备发送上述辅助信息。终端设备在发送该辅助信息之后,由RRC连接态进入空闲态。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device sends the aforementioned auxiliary information to the core network device in the RRC connected state. After sending the auxiliary information, the terminal device enters the idle state from the RRC connected state.
1005,核心网设备确定要寻呼终端设备。1005: The core network device determines to page the terminal device.
具体的,可以参见图7中步骤704中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。For details, please refer to the description in step 704 in FIG. 7, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
1006,核心网设备向接入网设备发送寻呼消息,该寻呼消息携带第四用户设备标识。1006. The core network device sends a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message carries the fourth user equipment identifier.
1007,接入网设备根据第四用户设备标识,确定第一用户身份的新的PO。1007. The access network device determines a new PO of the first user identity according to the fourth user equipment identifier.
1008,终端设备根据第四用户设备标识,确定第一用户身份的新的PO,并在该新的PO上监听寻呼消息。1008. The terminal device determines a new PO of the first user identity according to the fourth user equipment identifier, and monitors the paging message on the new PO.
具体的,根据第四用户设备标识,确定新的PO的过程可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, according to the fourth user equipment identifier, the process of determining the new PO can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
1009,接入网设备在新的PO上发送寻呼消息。1009: The access network device sends a paging message on the new PO.
因此,本申请实施例中,在终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的情况下,通过终端设备向核心网设备发送第一用户身份的用于确定寻呼时机的参数,使得核心网设备可以为第一用户身份重新分配一个用户设备标识,使得终端设备以第一用户身份在idle态监听寻呼消息时,能够在没有与第二用户身份的寻呼周期中的PO在时域资源上冲突的新的PO上监听,从而能够避免终端设备的多个用户身份出现寻呼冲突。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device sends the first user identity parameter for determining the paging occasion to the core network device, so that the core network The device can reassign a user equipment identity to the first user identity, so that when the terminal device listens to a paging message in the idle state as the first user identity, it can be in the time domain resource of the PO in the paging cycle without the identity of the second user. The conflicting new PO is monitored on the new PO, thereby avoiding paging conflicts of multiple user identities of the terminal device.
类似的,终端设备的第一用户身份在inactive态时,也可以在新的PO上监听寻呼消息。与终端设备的第一用户身份在idle态不同的是,在inactive态时,由接入网设备发起对终端设备的寻呼。并且,在终端设备进入inactive态之前,可以通过初始上下文建立请求将第四用户设备标识发送给接入网设备。另外,该接入网设备还可以向邻接接入网设备发送Xn寻呼消息,其中包含第四用户设备标识,用于指示邻接网络设备根据该第四用户设备标识,确定新的PO。邻接接入网设备还可以在该新的PO,上终端设备发送空口寻呼消息。具体的,终端设备的第一用户身份在inactive态时,监听寻呼消息的流程可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Similarly, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the inactive state, the paging message can also be monitored on the new PO. Different from the first user identity of the terminal device in the idle state, in the inactive state, the access network device initiates paging to the terminal device. In addition, before the terminal device enters the inactive state, the fourth user equipment identifier may be sent to the access network device through the initial context establishment request. In addition, the access network device may also send an Xn paging message to the adjacent access network device, which contains a fourth user equipment identifier, which is used to instruct the adjacent network device to determine a new PO based on the fourth user equipment identifier. The adjacent access network device can also send an air interface paging message to the terminal device on the new PO. Specifically, when the first user identity of the terminal device is in the inactive state, the flow of monitoring the paging message can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
根据前述方法,图11为本申请实施例提供的无线通信的装置1100的示意图。该装置1100还可以称为寻呼的装置。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1100 provided in an embodiment of this application. The device 1100 may also be referred to as a paging device.
一些实施例中,该装置1100可以为终端设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a terminal device.
一些实施例中,该装置1100可以为核心网设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于核心网设备的芯片或电路。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be a core network device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a core network device.
一些实施例中,该装置1100可以为接入网设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于接入网设备的芯片或电路。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be an access network device, or a chip or circuit, for example, a chip or circuit that can be provided in an access network device.
一种可能的方式中,该装置1100可以包括处理单元1110(即,处理器的一例)和收发单元1130。一些可能的实现方式中,处理单元1110还可以称为确定单元。一些可能的实现方式中,收发单元1130可以包括接收单元和发送单元。In a possible manner, the apparatus 1100 may include a processing unit 1110 (that is, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1130. In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit 1110 may also be referred to as a determining unit. In some possible implementations, the transceiver unit 1130 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit.
可选的,收发单元1130可以通过收发器或者收发器相关电路或者接口电路实现。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
可选的,该装置还可以包括存储单元1120。一种可能的方式中,该存储单元1120用于存储指令。可选的,该存储单元也可以用于存储数据或者信息。存储单元1120可以通过存储器实现。Optionally, the device may further include a storage unit 1120. In one possible manner, the storage unit 1120 is used to store instructions. Optionally, the storage unit may also be used to store data or information. The storage unit 1120 may be implemented by a memory.
一些可能的设计中,该处理单元1110用于执行该存储单元1120存储的指令,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中终端设备执行的步骤。或者,该处理单元1110可以用于调用存储单元1120的数据,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中终端设备执行的步骤。In some possible designs, the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method. Alternatively, the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
一些可能的设计中,该处理单元1110用于执行该存储单元1120存储的指令,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中核心网设备执行的步骤。或者,该处理单元1110可以用于调用存储单元1120的数据,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中核心网设备执行的步骤。In some possible designs, the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method. Alternatively, the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method.
一些可能的设计中,该处理单元1110用于执行该存储单元1120存储的指令,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中接入网设备执行的步骤。或者,该处理单元1110可以用于调用存储单元1120的数据,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中核心网设备执行的步骤。In some possible designs, the processing unit 1110 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the access network device in the foregoing method. Alternatively, the processing unit 1110 may be used to call the data of the storage unit 1120, so that the apparatus 1100 implements the steps performed by the core network device in the foregoing method.
例如,该处理单元1110、存储单元1120、收发单元1130可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。例如,该存储单元1120用于存储计算机程序,该处理单元1110可以用于从该存储单元1120中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制收发单元1130接收信号和/或发送信号,完成上述方法中终端设备或核心网设备或接入网设备的步骤。该存储单元1120可以集成在处理单元1110中,也可以与处理单元1110分开设置。For example, the processing unit 1110, the storage unit 1120, and the transceiver unit 1130 may communicate with each other through internal connection paths, and transmit control and/or data signals. For example, the storage unit 1120 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1110 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1120 to control the transceiver unit 1130 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method. Steps for terminal equipment or core network equipment or access network equipment. The storage unit 1120 may be integrated in the processing unit 1110, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1110.
可选地,若该装置1100为通信设备(例如,终端设备,或核心网设备,或接入网设备),该收发单元1130包括接收器和发送器。其中,接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。Optionally, if the apparatus 1100 is a communication device (for example, a terminal device, or a core network device, or an access network device), the transceiver unit 1130 includes a receiver and a transmitter. Among them, the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
可选地,若该装置1100为芯片或电路,该收发单元1130包括输入接口和输出接口。Optionally, if the device 1100 is a chip or a circuit, the transceiver unit 1130 includes an input interface and an output interface.
作为一种实现方式,收发单元1130的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元1110可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the function of the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 1110 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的通信设备(例如终端设备,或接入网设备,或核心网设备)。即将实现处理单元1110、收发单元1130功能的程序代码存储在存储单元1120中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元1120中的代码来实现处理单元1110、收发单元1130的功能。As another implementation manner, a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (such as a terminal device, or an access network device, or a core network device) provided in the embodiments of the present application. That is to say, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiving unit 1130 is stored in the storage unit 1120. The general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiving unit 1130 by executing the code in the storage unit 1120.
一些实施例中,装置1100可以为终端设备,或设置于终端设备的芯片或电路。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit provided in the terminal device.
当装置1100为终端设备,或设置于终端设备的芯片或电路时,处理单元1110,用于确定第一用户身份在所述第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一寻呼时机PO和第二 PO,所述第一PO和所述第二PO用于接入网设备寻呼所述装置。When the apparatus 1100 is a terminal device, or a chip or circuit provided in the terminal device, the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine that the first user identity includes the first paging occasion PO and the first paging opportunity in a paging cycle of the first user identity. The second PO, the first PO and the second PO are used for the access network device to page the device.
收发单元1130,用于以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO或在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。The transceiver unit 1130 is configured to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user.
可选的,所述装置1100还支持第二用户身份,所述装置1100在所述第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO。Optionally, the device 1100 also supports a second user identity, and the device 1100 includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity.
当所述第一PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。或When the time domain position of the first PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user on the second PO as the first user. or
当所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。或When the time domain position of the second PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity. or
当所述第一PO的时域位置和所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置均不重叠时,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上或所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息。When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the device operates in the first user as the first user. The PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user.
可选的,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。Optionally, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
可选的,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。Optionally, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
可选的,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。Optionally, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
可选的,所述收发单元1130还用于以所述第一用户身份从核心网设备接收所述第二用户设备标识,或者,所述第一偏移值,或者所述第二偏移值。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to receive the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value from the core network device as the first user identity .
可选的,收发单元1130,用于以所述第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述装置支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述装置的所述第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to send first indication information to the core network device as the first user identity, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the apparatus supports at least two user identities, or indicate that the The first user identity of the device includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
可选的,当所述处理单元1110确定所述第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与所述第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠时,所述收发单元1130还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述核心网设备发送所述第一指示信息。Optionally, when the processing unit 1110 determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to use the The first user identity sends the first indication information to the core network device.
当该装置1100配置在或本身即为终端设备时,装置1100中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。When the device 1100 is configured in or is a terminal device, each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
一些实施例中,装置1100可以为核心网设备时,或设置于核心网设备中的芯片或电路。当装置1100为核心网设备时,或设置于核心网设备中的芯片或电路时,收发单元1130, 用于获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be a core network device, or a chip or circuit provided in the core network device. When the apparatus 1100 is a core network device, or a chip or circuit provided in the core network device, the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to obtain first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two users The identity, or indicating the identity of the first user of the terminal device, includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
收发单元1130还用于向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
可选的,所述收发单元1130具体用于:向所述接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述接入网设备对所述终端设备进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: send a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and The paging message includes the second indication information.
可选的,所述收发单元1130具体用于:向所述接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is specifically configured to send an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
可选的,所述至少两个PO中包括第一PO和第二PO。Optionally, the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO.
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO;或The second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO;或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
可选的,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。Optionally, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
可选的,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。Optionally, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
可选的,所述收发单元1130还用于向所述终端设备发送所述第二用户设备标识,或所述第一偏移值,或所述第二偏移值。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is further configured to send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
当该装置1100配置在或本身即为核心网设备时,装置1100中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中核心网设备所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。When the device 1100 is configured in or is a core network device, each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the core network device in the above method. Here, in order to avoid repetition, the details are omitted. Description.
一些实施例中,装置1100可以为接入网设备时,或设置于接入网设备中的芯片或电路。当装置1100为接入网设备时,或设置于接入网设备中的芯片或电路时,收发单元1130,用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述装置在终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内的至少两个寻呼时机PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may be an access network device, or a chip or circuit provided in the access network device. When the device 1100 is an access network device, or a chip or circuit set in the access network device, the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to receive second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the device is in the terminal A paging message is sent to the terminal device on at least two paging occasions PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the device.
处理单元1110,用于确定所述寻呼周期内的第一PO和第二PO,其中,所述至少两个PO包括所述第一PO和所述第二PO;The processing unit 1110 is configured to determine a first PO and a second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO;
收发单元1130还用于在所述第一PO和所述第二PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
可选的,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的。Optionally, the time domain location of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity.
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识。或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的。或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value. or
所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
可选的,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。Optionally, the second offset value includes at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
可选的,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。Optionally, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
可选的,所述收发单元1130具体用于接收寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第一接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to receive a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, so The paging message includes the second indication information.
可选的,所述收发单元1130具体用于:从核心网设备接收所述寻呼消息。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive the paging message from a core network device.
可选的,所述收发单元1130具体用于:从第二接入网设备接收所述寻呼消息,所述第二接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive the paging message from a second access network device, where the second access network device stores the context of the first user identity of the terminal device The access network equipment.
可选的,收发单元1130单元具体用于:从所述核心网设备接收初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is specifically configured to: receive an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
可选的,收发单元1130还用于:向第三接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述装置是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第三接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to: send a paging message to a third access network device, where the device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message The paging message is used to instruct the third access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
可选的,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO。或Optionally, the second indication information includes a first user equipment identity and a second user equipment identity of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identity is used to determine the first user equipment identity. A PO, the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO. or
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO。或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO. or,
所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移值。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
可选的,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,或子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。Optionally, the second offset value includes a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
可选的,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。Optionally, the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
当该装置1100配置在或本身即为接入网设备时,装置1100中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中接入网设备所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。When the device 1100 is configured in or is an access network device, each module or unit in the device 1100 can be used to perform various actions or processing procedures performed by the access network device in the foregoing method. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, it is omitted. Its detailed description.
该装置1100所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明 及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For concepts, explanations, detailed descriptions, and other steps involved in the device 1100 related to the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application, please refer to the descriptions of these contents in the foregoing method or other embodiments, which are not repeated here.
图12为本申请提供的一种终端设备1200的结构示意图。该终端设备1200可以执行上述方法实施例中终端设备执行的动作。FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1200 provided by this application. The terminal device 1200 can perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
为了便于说明,图12仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图12所示,终端设备1200包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。For ease of description, FIG. 12 only shows the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 12, the terminal device 1200 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. For example, it is used to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment. The described action. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments. The control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图12仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 12 only shows a memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图12中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。For example, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data. The processor in FIG. 12 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected by technologies such as a bus. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and the various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备1200的收发单元1210,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备1200的处理单元1220。如图12所示,终端设备1200包括收发单元1210和处理单元1220。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1210中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1210中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and control circuit with the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit 1210 of the terminal device 1200, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit 1220 of the terminal device 1200. As shown in FIG. 12, the terminal device 1200 includes a transceiving unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220. The transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备1300的结构示意图,可以用于实现上述 方法中的接入设备(例如,第一接入网设备,第二接入网设备或者第三接入网设备)的功能。接入网设备1300包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1310和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)1320。所述RRU1310可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线1311和射频单元1312。所述RRU1310部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的信令消息。所述BBU1320部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU1310与BBU1320可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device 1300 provided by an embodiment of the application, which can be used to implement the access device (for example, the first access network device, the second access network device, or the third access network device) in the above method Access network equipment) function. The access network device 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as digital units, digital units, DU) 1320. The RRU 1310 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312. The RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the signaling messages described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment. The BBU1320 part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on. The RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU1320为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如该BBU(处理单元)1320可以用于控制基站40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading. For example, the BBU (processing unit) 1320 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
在一个示例中,所述BBU1320可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE系统,或5G系统),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU1320还包括存储器1321和处理器1322。所述存储器1321用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器1321存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器1322用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1321和处理器1322可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), and may also support different connections. Enter the standard wireless access network. The BBU 1320 further includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322. The memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data. For example, the memory 1321 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment and so on. The processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
在一种可能的实施方式中,随着片上系统(system-on-chip,SoC)技术的发展,可以将1320部分和1310部分的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现,例如由一颗基站功能芯片实现,该基站功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、天线接口等器件,基站相关功能的程序存储在存储器中,由处理器执行程序以实现基站的相关功能。可选的,该基站功能芯片也能够读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现基站的相关功能。In a possible implementation manner, with the development of system-on-chip (SoC) technology, all or part of the functions of part 1320 and part 1310 can be realized by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip Realization, the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices, the program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the related functions of the base station. Optionally, the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
应理解,图13示例的接入网设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的基站结构的可能。It should be understood that the structure of the access network device illustrated in FIG. 13 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other types of base station structures that may appear in the future.
应理解,本申请实施例中,该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that, in this embodiment of the application, the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), and dedicated integration Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、 双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (DRAM). Access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Take memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The foregoing embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination. When implemented by software, the above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述任一实施例中的终端设备执行的步骤,或者核心网设备执行的步骤,或者接入网设备执行的步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the steps performed by the terminal device in any of the above embodiments or the steps performed by the core network device are implemented. Or the steps performed by the access network equipment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一实施例中的终端设备执行的步骤,或者核心网设备执行的步骤,或者接入网设备执行的步骤。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product that, when executed by a computer, implements the steps performed by the terminal device in any of the above embodiments, or the steps performed by the core network device, or the steps performed by the access network device. step.
本申请实施例还提供了一种系统芯片,该系统芯片包括:通信单元和处理单元。该处理单元,例如可以是处理器。该通信单元例如可以是通信接口、输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。该处理单元可执行计算机指令,以使该通信装置内的芯片执行上述本申请实施例提供的终端设备执行的步骤,或者核心网设备执行的步骤,或者接入网设备执行的步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a system chip, which includes a communication unit and a processing unit. The processing unit may be a processor, for example. The communication unit may be, for example, a communication interface, an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, or the like. The processing unit can execute computer instructions so that the chip in the communication device executes the steps performed by the terminal device provided in the embodiments of the present application, or the steps performed by the core network device, or the steps performed by the access network device.
可选地,该计算机指令被存储在存储单元中。Optionally, the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned core network equipment, access network equipment, and terminal equipment.
本申请中的各个实施例可以独立的使用,也可以进行联合的使用,这里不做限定。The various embodiments in this application can be used independently or in combination, which is not limited here.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
应理解,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或 B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少一个”是指一个或一个以上;“A和B中的至少一个”,类似于“A和/或B”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和B中的至少一个,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。It should be understood that "and/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B alone exists. Happening. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "At least one" refers to one or more than one; "At least one of A and B", similar to "A and/or B", describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and B At least one of them can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (56)

  1. 一种寻呼的方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于终端设备,所述终端设备支持第一用户身份,所述方法包括:A paging method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity, and the method includes:
    所述终端设备确定第一用户身份在所述第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一寻呼时机PO和第二PO,所述第一PO和所述第二PO用于接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备;The terminal device determines that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used to access the network The device pages the terminal device;
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO或在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。The terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user identity.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备还支持第二用户身份,所述终端设备在所述第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO;The method according to claim 1, wherein the terminal device also supports a second user identity, and the terminal device includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity;
    当所述第一PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息;或When the time domain position of the first PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the second PO as the first user identity; or
    当所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息;或When the time domain position of the second PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the search of the second user identity on the third PO. Paging message, the terminal device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity; or
    当所述第一PO的时域位置和所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置均不重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上或所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息。When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the terminal device is in the first user as the first user. A PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO news.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the time domain position of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identification of the first user identity;
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识;或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的;或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The method according to claim 3, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  5. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  6. 根据权利要求3-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 3-5, further comprising:
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份从核心网设备接收所述第二用户设备标识,或者,所述第一偏移值,或者所述第二偏移值。The terminal device receives the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value from the core network device as the first user identity.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that it further comprises:
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。The terminal device sends first indication information to the core network device as the first user identity, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicates that the terminal device The first user identity includes at least two POs in one paging cycle.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 7, further comprising:
    当所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠时,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份向所述核心网设备发送所述第一指示信息。When the terminal device determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity of the terminal device, the terminal device assumes the identity of the first user Sending the first indication information to the core network device.
  9. 一种寻呼的方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于核心网设备,所述方法包括:A paging method, characterized in that the method is applicable to core network equipment, and the method includes:
    所述核心网设备获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO;The core network device obtains first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicates that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two user identities in one paging cycle. PO;
    所述核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The core network device sends second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the core network device sending the second indication information to the access network device comprises:
    所述核心网设备向所述接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述接入网设备对所述终端设备进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息中包括所述第二指示信息。The core network device sends a paging message to the access network device, the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and the paging message includes the first 2. Instruction information.
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the core network device sending the second indication information to the access network device comprises:
    所述核心网设备向所述接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。The core network device sends an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, and the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11任一项的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两个PO中包括第一PO和第二PO,The method according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO;或The second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO;或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The method according to claim 12, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  15. 根据权利要求12-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 12-14, further comprising:
    所述核心网设备向所述终端设备发送所述第二用户设备标识,或所述第一偏移值,或所述第二偏移值。The core network device sends the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the second offset value to the terminal device.
  16. 一种寻呼的方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于第一接入网设备,所述方法包括:A paging method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a first access network device, and the method includes:
    所述第一接入网设备接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一接入网设备在终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内的至少两个寻呼时机PO上向所述终端 设备发送寻呼消息;The first access network device receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first access network device has at least two paging cycles in one paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device. Sending a paging message to the terminal device on the paging occasion PO;
    所述第一接入网设备确定所述寻呼周期内的第一PO和第二PO,其中,所述至少两个PO包括所述第一PO和所述第二PO;Determining, by the first access network device, a first PO and a second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO;
    所述第一接入网设备在所述第一PO和所述第二PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The first access network device sends a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的;The method according to claim 16, wherein the time domain position of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identification of the first user identity;
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识;或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的;或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The method according to claim 17, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  20. 根据权利要求16-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入网设备接收第二指示信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-19, wherein the receiving of the second indication information by the first access network device comprises:
    所述第一接入网设备接收寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第一接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。The first access network device receives a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message Including the second indication information.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入网设备接收寻呼消息,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein the first access network device receiving a paging message comprises:
    所述第一接入网设备从核心网设备接收所述寻呼消息。The first access network device receives the paging message from a core network device.
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入网设备接收寻呼消息,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein the first access network device receiving a paging message comprises:
    所述第一接入网设备从第二接入网设备接收所述寻呼消息,所述第二接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。The first access network device receives the paging message from a second access network device, and the second access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device .
  23. 根据权利要求16-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入网设备接收第二指示信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-19, wherein the receiving of the second indication information by the first access network device comprises:
    所述第一接入网设备从所述核心网设备接收初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。The first access network device receives an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, and the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  24. 根据权利要求16-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-19, further comprising:
    所述第一接入网设备向第三接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述第一接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第三接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。The first access network device sends a paging message to a third access network device, and the first access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, so The paging message is used to instruct the third access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  25. 根据权利要求16-24任一项的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO;或The method according to any one of claims 16-24, wherein the second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein all The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第 一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO;或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移值。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,或子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The method according to claim 25, wherein the second offset value comprises a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  28. 一种寻呼的装置,其特征在于,所述装置支持第一用户身份,所述装置包括:A paging device, characterized in that the device supports a first user identity, and the device includes:
    确定单元,用于确定第一用户身份在所述第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第一寻呼时机PO和第二PO,所述第一PO和所述第二PO用于接入网设备寻呼所述装置;The determining unit is configured to determine that the first user identity includes a first paging occasion PO and a second PO within a paging cycle of the first user identity, and the first PO and the second PO are used for access The network equipment pages the device;
    接收单元,用于以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO或在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息。The receiving unit is configured to monitor the paging message of the first user on the first PO or on the second PO as the first user.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还支持第二用户身份,The device according to claim 28, wherein the device also supports a second user identity,
    所述装置在所述第二用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括第三PO;The apparatus includes a third PO in one paging cycle of the second user identity;
    当所述第一PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息;或When the time domain position of the first PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user on the second PO as the first user; or
    当所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置重叠时,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息;或When the time domain position of the second PO overlaps with the time domain position of the third PO, the device uses the second user identity to monitor the paging of the second user identity on the third PO Message, the device monitors the paging message of the first user identity on the first PO as the first user identity; or
    当所述第一PO的时域位置和所述第二PO的时域位置与所述第三PO的时域位置均不重叠时,所述装置以所述第一用户身份在所述第一PO上或所述第二PO上监听所述第一用户身份的寻呼消息,所述装置以所述第二用户身份在所述第三PO上监听所述第二用户身份的寻呼消息。When the time domain position of the first PO and the time domain position of the second PO do not overlap with the time domain position of the third PO, the device operates in the first user as the first user. The PO or the second PO monitors the paging message of the first user identity, and the device monitors the paging message of the second user identity on the third PO as the second user.
  30. 根据权利要求28或29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的;The apparatus according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the time domain position of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity;
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识;或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的;或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  32. 根据权利要求30或31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The apparatus according to claim 30 or 31, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  33. 根据权利要求30-32任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于以所 述第一用户身份从核心网设备接收所述第二用户设备标识,或者,所述第一偏移值,或者所述第二偏移值。The apparatus according to any one of claims 30-32, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive the second user equipment identifier from a core network device as the first user identity, or the first user equipment An offset value, or the second offset value.
  34. 根据权利要求28-33任一项的装置,其特征在于,还包括:The device according to any one of claims 28-33, further comprising:
    发送单元,用于以所述第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述装置支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述装置的所述第一用户身份在一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO。The sending unit is configured to send first indication information to the core network device with the identity of the first user, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the apparatus supports at least two user identities, or indicate the first user identity of the apparatus A user identity includes at least two POs in a paging cycle.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,The device of claim 34, wherein:
    当所述确定单元确定所述第一用户身份的PO的时域位置与所述第二用户身份的PO的时域位置重叠时,所述发送单元还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述核心网设备发送所述第一指示信息。When the determining unit determines that the time domain position of the PO of the first user identity overlaps with the time domain position of the PO of the second user identity, the sending unit is further configured to report to the location of the PO as the first user identity. The core network device sends the first indication information.
  36. 一种寻呼的装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A paging device, characterized in that the device comprises:
    接收单元,用于获取第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备支持至少两个用户身份,或指示所述终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内包括至少两个PO;The receiving unit is configured to obtain first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports at least two user identities, or indicates that the first user identity of the terminal device includes at least two user identities in one paging cycle PO;
    发送单元,用于向接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在所述至少两个PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The sending unit is configured to send second indication information to the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access network device to send a paging message to the terminal device on the at least two POs.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元具体用于:The device according to claim 36, wherein the sending unit is specifically configured to:
    向所述接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述接入网设备对所述终端设备进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Send a paging message to the access network device, where the paging message is used to instruct the access network device to page the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  38. 根据权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元具体用于:The device according to claim 36, wherein the sending unit is specifically configured to:
    向所述接入网设备发送初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Sending an initial context establishment request message to the access network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  39. 根据权利要求36-38任一项的装置,其特征在于,所述至少两个PO中包括第一PO和第二PO,The device according to any one of claims 36-38, wherein the at least two POs include a first PO and a second PO,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO;或The second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal device, wherein the first user equipment identification is used to determine the first PO, so The second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO;或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate the offset of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  41. 根据权利要求39或40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The apparatus according to claim 39 or 40, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  42. 根据权利要求39-41任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于向所述终端设备发送所述第二用户设备标识,或所述第一偏移值,或所述第二偏移值。The apparatus according to any one of claims 39-41, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the second user equipment identifier, or the first offset value, or the terminal device to the terminal device. The second offset value.
  43. 一种寻呼的装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A paging device, characterized in that the device comprises:
    接收单元,用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述装置在终端设备的第一用户身份的一个寻呼周期内的至少两个寻呼时机PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息;The receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the device to report to the terminal on at least two paging occasions PO in a paging cycle of the first user identity of the terminal device The device sends a paging message;
    确定单元,用于确定所述寻呼周期内的第一PO和第二PO,其中,所述至少两个PO包括所述第一PO和所述第二PO;A determining unit, configured to determine a first PO and a second PO in the paging cycle, where the at least two POs include the first PO and the second PO;
    发送单元,用于在所述第一PO和所述第二PO上向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息。The sending unit is configured to send a paging message to the terminal device on the first PO and the second PO.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识确定的;The apparatus according to claim 43, wherein the time domain position of the first PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity;
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户身份的第二用户设备标识确定的,其中,所述第二用户设备标识不同于所述第一用户设备标识;或者The time domain location of the second PO is determined according to the second user equipment identification of the first user identity, where the second user equipment identification is different from the first user equipment identification; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一用户设备标识及第一偏移值确定的;或者The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the first user equipment identifier and the first offset value; or
    所述第二PO的时域位置是根据所述第一PO的时域位置及第二偏移值确定的,其中,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移量。The time domain position of the second PO is determined according to the time domain position of the first PO and a second offset value, where the second offset value is used to indicate the time domain position of the second PO The offset relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The apparatus according to claim 44, wherein the second offset value comprises at least one of a radio frame offset value, a subframe offset value, and a paging frame offset value.
  46. 根据权利要求44或45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The apparatus according to claim 44 or 45, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes a temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  47. 根据权利要求43-46任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 43-46, wherein the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
    接收寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第一接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Receiving a paging message, where the paging message is used to instruct the first access network device to page the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元具体用于:The device according to claim 47, wherein the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
    从核心网设备接收所述寻呼消息。Receiving the paging message from the core network device.
  49. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元具体用于:The device according to claim 47, wherein the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
    从第二接入网设备接收所述寻呼消息,所述第二接入网设备是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。Receiving the paging message from a second access network device, where the second access network device is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device.
  50. 根据权利要求43-46任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 43-46, wherein the receiving unit is specifically configured to:
    从所述核心网设备接收初始上下文建立请求消息,所述初始上下文建立请求消息中包括所述第二指示信息。Receiving an initial context establishment request message from the core network device, where the initial context establishment request message includes the second indication information.
  51. 根据权利要求43-46任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 43-46, wherein the sending unit is further configured to:
    向第三接入网设备发送寻呼消息,所述装置是保存所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的上下文的接入网设备,所述寻呼消息用于指示所述第三接入网设备对所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进行寻呼,所述寻呼消息包括所述第二指示信息。Send a paging message to a third access network device, where the apparatus is an access network device that saves the context of the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message is used to indicate the third access The network device pages the first user identity of the terminal device, and the paging message includes the second indication information.
  52. 根据权利要求43-51任一项的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二用户设备标识,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二用户设备标识用于确定所述第二PO;或The apparatus according to any one of claims 43-51, wherein the second indication information includes a first user equipment identification and a second user equipment identification of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, wherein The first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, and the second user equipment identifier is used to determine the second PO; or
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第一偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第一偏移值用于确定所述第二PO;或,The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a first offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The first offset value is used to determine the second PO; or,
    所述第二指示信息包括所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识和第二偏移值,其中,所述第一用户设备标识用于确定所述第一PO,所述第二偏移值用于确定所述第二PO,所述第二偏移值用于指示所述第二PO的时域位置相对所述第一PO的时域位置的偏移值。The second indication information includes a first user equipment identifier and a second offset value of the first user identity of the terminal equipment, where the first user equipment identifier is used to determine the first PO, so The second offset value is used to determine the second PO, and the second offset value is used to indicate an offset value of the time domain position of the second PO relative to the time domain position of the first PO.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二偏移值包括无线帧偏移值,或子帧偏移值和寻呼帧偏移值中的至少一个。The apparatus according to claim 52, wherein the second offset value comprises a radio frame offset value, or at least one of a subframe offset value and a paging frame offset value.
  54. 根据权利要求52或53所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一用户身份的第一用户设备标识包括所述第一用户身份的临时移动用户识别码S-TMSI。The apparatus according to claim 52 or 53, wherein the first user equipment identifier of the first user identity includes the temporary mobile user identification code S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  55. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括用于执行如权利要求1-27任一项所述的方法的指令。A computer storage medium, characterized in that it is used to store a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the method according to any one of claims 1-27.
  56. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片包括:A chip, characterized in that the chip includes:
    处理器和通信接口,所述处理器用于从所述通信接口调用并运行指令,当所述处理器执行所述指令时,实现如权利要求1-27中任一项所述的方法。A processor and a communication interface, where the processor is used to call and execute instructions from the communication interface, and when the processor executes the instructions, the method according to any one of claims 1-27 is implemented.
PCT/CN2019/109663 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 Paging method and apparatus WO2021062745A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/109663 WO2021062745A1 (en) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 Paging method and apparatus
CN201980100388.3A CN114424637B (en) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 Paging method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/109663 WO2021062745A1 (en) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 Paging method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021062745A1 true WO2021062745A1 (en) 2021-04-08

Family

ID=75337647

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/109663 WO2021062745A1 (en) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 Paging method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114424637B (en)
WO (1) WO2021062745A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101790872A (en) * 2007-07-10 2010-07-28 高通股份有限公司 Multihop paging of a peer in a peer-to-peer communication network
CN102573065A (en) * 2011-12-27 2012-07-11 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Communication terminal and paging message receiving method and device thereof
US20130244660A1 (en) * 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Mitigating paging collision for dual-camped single radio receivers
CN106851018A (en) * 2013-04-25 2017-06-13 英特尔德国有限责任公司 Communication equipment and the method for controlling communication equipment

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114845391B (en) * 2017-01-25 2024-04-23 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting paging message
CN109392090B (en) * 2017-08-03 2021-10-22 华为技术有限公司 Paging method and device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101790872A (en) * 2007-07-10 2010-07-28 高通股份有限公司 Multihop paging of a peer in a peer-to-peer communication network
CN102573065A (en) * 2011-12-27 2012-07-11 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Communication terminal and paging message receiving method and device thereof
US20130244660A1 (en) * 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Mitigating paging collision for dual-camped single radio receivers
CN106851018A (en) * 2013-04-25 2017-06-13 英特尔德国有限责任公司 Communication equipment and the method for controlling communication equipment

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
VIVO, CHINA TELECOM, CAICT, XIAOMI, CMCC, CHARTER COMMUNICATIONS, CHINA UNICOM, SAMSUNG: "Considerations on multi-SIM study in RAN", 3GPP DRAFT; RP-191304 CONSIDERATIONS ON MULTI-SIM STUDY IN RAN, vol. TSG RAN, 27 May 2019 (2019-05-27), Newport Beach, USA, pages 1 - 7, XP051739632 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114424637A (en) 2022-04-29
CN114424637B (en) 2023-02-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230117911A1 (en) Condition-based secondary node or primary secondary cell change method and device
US11838815B2 (en) Cell handover method, terminal device, and network device
CN115065988B (en) Relay transmission method, relay terminal and remote terminal
WO2021063071A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
US20230070801A1 (en) Multicast downlink service notification method, terminal device and network device
US20220225274A1 (en) Paging message detection method, apparatus, and communication device
US20230086410A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
EP3790329B1 (en) Method for updating system information, terminal device, and wireless communication system
US20230029283A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20230209416A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2021195848A1 (en) Method for determining paging time position, method for sending paging, user terminal and network device
US20220225273A1 (en) Paging method and apparatus
WO2021062578A1 (en) Wireless communication method, network device and terminal device
US20230397298A1 (en) Timer operating method, terminal device, and network device
WO2020135645A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2019218126A1 (en) Method for controlling network congestion, terminal device, and network device
WO2021159863A1 (en) Communication parameter measurement method for multi-sim terminal device, terminal device and access network device
WO2021062770A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2021195846A1 (en) Information reporting method, information acquisition method, user terminal and network device
WO2021062745A1 (en) Paging method and apparatus
WO2021120009A1 (en) Signal detection method, signal transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2021163978A1 (en) Method for controlling state of secondary cell group, and terminal device
WO2023102812A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2022213264A1 (en) Terminal capability notification method, terminal device, and network device
WO2021168628A1 (en) Search space group switching method, terminal device and network device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19947960

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19947960

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1